2014 Dodge Charger SRT Owner`s Manual

2014 Dodge Charger SRT Owner`s Manual
2014 Charger SRT
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
FCA US LLC
14D482-126-AE
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Charger
SRT
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA
US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA
Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design
and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2016 FCA US LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfacLLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
tion.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 7
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartment.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .21
䡵 SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .22
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .26
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 䡵 TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .55
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .56
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .59 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .97
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .67
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
feature, (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things To
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further information).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
2
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, cycle the ignition
OFF and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle
unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node
(KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
CAUTION!
• Do not make modifications or alterations to the
immobilizer system. Modifications or alterations to
the immobilization system may result in a loss of
security protection.
• The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and loss of security protection.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
engine being shut off after two seconds.
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal Replacement Keys
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron- NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
as possible by an authorized dealer.
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved Rearming Of The System
by the party responsible for compliance could void the If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
after 15 additional minutes, and then the Vehicle Security
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors Alarm will rearm itself.
for unauthorized entry and the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
START/STOP button for unauthorized operation. While To Arm The System
the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, interior switches for Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
door locks and decklid release are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will pro- 1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to ⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting
vide the following audible and visible signals: the horn
And Operating⬙ for further information).
will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn signals will flash,
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
and the Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
will flash.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF
and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the • Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
vehicle:
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch • Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
information.
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
in ⬙Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for
position.
further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP button
(RKE) transmitter.
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
3. If any doors are open, close them.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn the
key to the ON position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
NOTE:
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle Tamper Alert
Security Alarm.
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the Security System Manual Override
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the doors using the manual door lock plunger.
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the • The front courtesy overhead console and door courRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
doors or open any door.
“Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the • The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur(extreme bottom position).
ther information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
2
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors
Flash Lights With Lock
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
This feature will cause the signal lights to flash when the
doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature
can be turned on or turned off. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Headlight Illumination On Approach
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under “Things To Know Before
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- To Lock The Doors
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Using The Panic Alarm
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
headlights, park lights and turn signals will flash, the
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turn on.
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
Instrument Panel” for further information.
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
To Unlatch The Trunk
(24 km/h) or greater
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
NOTE:
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to • The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under “Things To Know Before
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
and horn will remain on.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
other hand.
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Emergency Key Removal
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
Separating The RKE Transmitter Case
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved NOTE:
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
distance, check for these two conditions:
reduce this range.
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
How To Use Remote Start
the battery is a minimum of three years.
All of the following conditions must be met before the
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
engine will remote start:
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
• Shift lever in PARK
radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry • Trunk closed
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the vehicle while still • Hazard switch off
maintaining security. The system has a range of • Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE panic button not pushed
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
• System not disabled from previous remote start event vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Vehicle security alarm not active
• Ignition in OFF position
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is cycled
to the ON/RUN position.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
Push and release the REMOTE START button
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if Vehicle
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
NOTE:
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. Start request.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Remote Start mode.
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
in the Remote Start mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle, DOOR LOCKS
push and release the START/STOP button.
Manual Door Locks
NOTE: The message “Push Start Button” will display in To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
the EVIC until you push the START button.
trim panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
upward.
occur:
Cancel Remote Start
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm
• Any engine warning lights come on
• Low Fuel Light turns on
• The hood is opened
• The hazard switch is pressed
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK
• The brake pedal is pressed
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Door Lock Knob
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
2
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go™ under
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you press the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN position, and any
front door is open, the power locks will not operate. This
prevents you from accidentally locking the Key Fob in
the vehicle. Cycling the ignition to the OFF position or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
is open, and the ignition is in the ACC or ON/RUN
position, a chime will sound as a reminder to remove the
Key Fob.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
3. The driver door is opened.
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The vehicle was in motion, then speed returned to
0 mph (0 km/h) and the transmission shift lever is
placed in PARK.
4. The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
2
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive Entry Door
Handle and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm the
security alarm.
2
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the
doors are locked using the door panel switch, a valid
Transmitter In Vehicle
Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
• The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter.
is in the OFF position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
• The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the
Passive Entry door handles.
• The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
2
• There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
To Enter The Trunk
CHMSL Button
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
(1.5 m) of the deck lid, press the button on the right side
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
of CHMSL, (Center High Mounted Stop Light) which is
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
located on the deck lid.
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
deck lid.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
Press The Door Handle Button To Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
NOTE:
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock
the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This
is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
2
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
Power Window Switches
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and some model
passenger door power window switches have an AUTOdown feature. Press the window switch to the second
detent, release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, press the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
AUTO-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch to the second detent, release, and
the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO operation, push down on the switch briefly.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to Reset Auto-Up
the first detent and release it when you want the window Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
to stop.
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
NOTE:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
• If the window runs into any obstacle during auto- 2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
switch again to close the window.
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
detent to open the window completely and continue
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoto hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
after the window is fully open.
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
Window Lockout Switch
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
press and release the window lockout button (setting it in
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls, Wind Buffeting
press and release the window lockout button again Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
(setting it in the UP position).
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
Window Lockout Switch
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by
pressing the TRUNK RELEASE button located on the
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the With the ignition in the OFF position or the key removed
button will operate.
from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open symbol will
display until the trunk is closed.
The trunk lid can be released from
outside the vehicle by pressing the
TRUNK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
twice within five seconds.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Trunk Release
Button
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Trunk Emergency Release
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency Release Some of the most important safety features in your
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the vehicle are the restraint systems:
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-theall passengers
dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechanism.
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passenger
• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
• Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
Trunk Emergency Internal Release
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
energy during an impact event
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
on LATCH, refer to Child Restraints under “Things To
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informaseat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
tion.
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
item in a seat — if equipped
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
Please pay close attention to the information in this
severity and type of collision.
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
possible.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(refer to Child Restraints under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be 3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltFront Air Bags room to inflate.
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
their arm.
between you and the door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with
your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some
collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belts even though you have air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air bags
need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument
panel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in an collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
vehicle or being thrown out.
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
WARNING!
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the • Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
be belted at all times.
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
Lap/Shoulder Belts
using a seat belt properly.
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with • Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
lap/shoulder belts.
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make
the belt go around your lap.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
Pulling Out The Lap/Shoulder Belt Latch Plate
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it
is too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
Removing Slack From Belt
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it
up or down to the position that fits you best.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
First Row
Second
Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
Center
N/A
ALR
Passenger
ALR
ALR
• N/A — Not Applicable
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click⬙.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretencollision.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
the occupant’s chest.
(BeltAlert®)
Energy Management Feature
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
BeltAlert® is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert®) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
The BeltAlert® warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occupants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert® will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert® is not active when
the front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert® may
be triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the
front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly
stowed.
BeltAlert® can be enabled or disabled by your authorized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert®.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert® has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert®) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
In addition, the vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Side Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
NOTE: The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bags are certified to new Federal regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
3 — Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag/Knee Bolster
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag • Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
• Air Bag Warning Light
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
air bags are located above the side windows and their • Steering Wheel and Column
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
• Instrument Panel
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat• Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The • Knee Impact Bolsters
SABs are located in the outboard side of the front seats.
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
NOTE:
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
Air Bag System Components
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
bag only.
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for sideimpact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward,
covering both windows on the impact side.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during
impacts that require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
NOTE:
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should remain
free from any obstructions.
(Continued)
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
• Do not allow occupants to extend any part of their
body outside of the window.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection and works together with the Driver
Advanced Front Air Bag during a frontal impact.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Knee Impact Bolsters
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
several factors, including the severity and type of impact.
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu- Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front Knee Air Bag are designed to provide additional protecAir Bags.
tion by supplementing the seat belts in certain frontal
collisions depending on several factors, including the
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
severity and type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags
Air Bags work with the knee impact bolsters to provide
and Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag are not
improved protection for the driver and front passenger.
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
rollover collisions.
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system Side Knee Air Bag will not deploy in all frontal collisions,
including some that may produce substantial vehicle
required for this vehicle.
damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or underrides, and angle offset collisions. On the other
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required. hand, depending on the type and location of impact,
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic Advanced Front Air Bags and Supplemental Driver Side
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
bags, SAB, Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag, and
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Knee Air Bag may deploy in crashes with little vehicle ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF position, or in
front-end damage but that produce a severe initial decel- the ACC position, the air bag system is not on and the air
eration.
bags will not inflate.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions. The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
type of collision.
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colliORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
away from an inflating air bag.
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of comes on again after initial startup.
the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag Inflator
Unit
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a large quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully
inflates in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves
at a very high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items
are positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates.
This especially applies to children.
The Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag unit is
located in the instrument panel trim beneath the steering
column. When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A
large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Supplemental Driver Side Knee Air Bag. The trim cover
separates and folds out of the way allowing the air bag to
inflate to the full size. The air bag fully inflates in about
15 to 20 milliseconds.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition is cycled off.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
removed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
• Unlock the doors automatically.
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
events.
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
or all of the following may occur:
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s infront passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
structions for cleaning.
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- Maintaining Your Air Bag System
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
2
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
cycled to the ON/RUN.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine • How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
were buckled/fastened;
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to “Fuses” in • How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for the proper air bag fuses.
See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
These data can help provide a better understanding of
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the car seat.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly • For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer
to Transport Canada’s website for additional information:
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
• http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedriverschildsafety-index-53.htm
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining
Children In Vehicles
Infants and
Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too
Large for Child
Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight
Or Age
Children who are two years old or younger
and who have not reached the height or
weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
out-grown the height or weight limit of
their booster seat
Recommended Type Of
Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a
Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the
vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a
vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward because it can loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has been
adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A
child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of
position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
+ Top Tether
Tether Anchor
Only
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the center position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
N/A
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Center position only may be removed.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
2
Tether Strap Anchorages
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end Always follow the directions of the child restraint
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
here.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, 1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autodo not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
belt following the instructions below. See the section
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
position.
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH Child Restraint System” for typical
installation instructions.
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacrestraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
turer’s instructions.
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
to allow more room for the child seat.
in any direction.
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatWhen using the LATCH attaching system to install a
ing position.
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the used by other occupants or being used to secure child
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc- with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
tions to attach a tether anchor.
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. The child could be badly injured
or killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be
removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a
forward facing child restraint, up
to the recommended weight limit
of the child restraint.
Contact between the front
passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
Center position only may be
removed.
In positions with cinching latch
plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
may be twisted up to 3 full turns.
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an
ALR retractor.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
more room for the child seat.
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
path.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
vehicle seat.
“click”.
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect Anchorage
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
1. Look behind the seating position where you
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
plan to install the child restraint to find the
attach a tether anchor.
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
seat forward to provide better access to the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
anchorage for that seating position, move
in any direction.
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
2
Adjustable Headrest Downward Position
Adjustable Headrest Release Push Button
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Cover
3 — Attaching Strap
A — Tether Strap Hook
B — Tether Anchor
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Center Tether Attachment
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint to the full
down position.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback and head A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
restraint.
(engine, transmission, clutch, and rear axle) in your new
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to vehicle.
the center tether anchorage located in the panel be- Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). After
tween the rear seatback and the rear window.
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child or 90 km/h) are desirable.
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Transporting Pets
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet. be detrimental and should be avoided.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in The engine oil is a high performance synthetic lubricant,
the transmission fluid and axle lubricant installed at the
a collision.
factory is high-quality and energy-conserving. Oil, fluid,
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
and lubricant changes should be consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and
quality grades, refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty. Please check
your oil level with the engine oil indicator often during
the break in period. Add oil as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel
the air directed against the windshield. See your authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Door Latches
Tires
Fluid Leaks
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .114
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . .110
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .114
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features
Of Sun Visor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Rear Cross Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Outside Mirrors Approach Light —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . . . .112
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Uconnect® PHONE (4.3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Uconnect® 4.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Things You Should Know About
Your Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Uconnect® Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .143
▫ Things You Should Know About
Your Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
䡵 VOICE COMMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
▫ Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
▫ Uconnect® Voice Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148 䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
䡵 Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N) . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .206
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .212
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .213
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote
Keyless Entry Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . .213
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory
Seat Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .216
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .219
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .224 䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
▫ Ambient Light — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .226
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
䡵 ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED .
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .228
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .234
. . . . .235
. . . . .237
. . . . .239
▫ Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .231
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . . .233
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .246
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .247
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .260
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .262
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . . .267
▫ Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped . . . .270
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
䡵 PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .254
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . . . . . .277
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
▫ Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts . . . . . . . . . . .277
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .259
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . . . . . .279
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .291
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .279
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
䡵 PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ Turning ParkView® On Or Off —
With Touchscreen Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped . . .284
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .286
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . . .287
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .290
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .295
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .296
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
Automatic
Dimming
Mirror — If Equipped
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
in both mirrors when you use the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter or open any door. This LED shines
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
outward to illuminate the front and rear door handles. It
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
also shines downward to illuminate the area in front of
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
the doors.
forward, full rearward and normal.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will automatically adjust for headlight glare when the inside
mirror adjusts.
Outside Mirrors Approach Light — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors equipped with
approach lighting contain one LED, which is located in
the upper outboard mirror glass corner. The approach
light supplies illuminated entry lighting, which turns on
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the
ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors
will move slightly downward from the present position
when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside
mirrors will then return to the original position when the
vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each
stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned
on when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel.
Power Mirror Control
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select buttons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
the mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to An illuminated vanity mirror is located on the sun visor.
move.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by swing the mirror cover upward. The light turns on
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver automatically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grab the sun visor and pull
rearwards until the sun visor is in the desired position. To
use the extender feature of the sun visor, grab the
extender which is located at the rear of the visor and pull
rearward.
3
Slide-On-Rod Feature
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) —
IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Automatic Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
3
Manual Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any gear and enters stand-by mode when the Park Brake
is engaged, the vehicle is not in REVERSE, and the
vehicle is stationary.
BSM Warning Light
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 23 ft (7 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de- detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
tection zones.
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage, traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert adjacent lanes.
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Stationary Objects
Overtaking/Passing
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and deUconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/
tected object are present on the same side at the same
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
be reduced.
Modes Of Operation
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE:
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
system, the radio volume is reduced.
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts • If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the approthe RCP state always requests the chime.
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opWhen the BSM system is turned off there will be no visual
eration of the device.
or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP systems.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
other than an authorized service facility could void
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle is
authorization to use this equipment.
started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
Uconnect® PHONE (4.3)
Blind Spot Alert Off
General Information
Uconnect® 4.3
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Uconnect® Phone supports the following features:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
Voice Activated Features:
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mobile”
or, “Dial 248-555-1212”)
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”)
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call Back”)
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device via the
touchscreen,
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
• View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,” “Show
to connect to them quickly.
Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show Recent
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
Calls”)
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
mute your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
Smith Mobile”)
For Uconnect® customer support:
Screen Activated Features:
• U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call
• Dialing via Keypad using the touchscreen,
1-877-855-8400.
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis• Canadian Residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or
played on the touchscreen,
call, 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
If your mobile phone only supports the Headset Profile
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen,
you may not be able to use any Uconnect® Phone
features. Refer to your mobile service provider or the
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs,
phone manufacturer for details.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone
allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be
linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
phone and one audio device can be used with the system
at a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or
French languages.
Uconnect® Phone Button
Button is used to
The Uconnect® Phone
enter the phone mode and make calls, show
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view
phonebook etc., When you press the button
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your
you will hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
a command.
Uconnect® features Bluetooth® technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect® Voice Command Button
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
Button is
The Uconnect® Voice Command
only used for “barge in” and when you are You will be prompted for a specific command and then
already in a call and you want to send Tones guided through the available options.
or make another call.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehiprompt.
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
switch), if so equipped.
“John Smith” and then “mobile,” the following compound command can be said: “Call John Smith moOperation
bile.”
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
compound command form of the voice command is
Uconnect® Phone prompts. There are two general methgiven. You can also break the commands into parts and
ods for how Voice Command works:
say each part of the command when you are asked for
it. For example, you can use the compound command
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mobile.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
can break the compound command form into two
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked
“John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone
works best when you talk in a normal conversational
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sentence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pressing
Natural Speech
the “Voice Command”
button on your steering
Your Uconnect® Phone Voice system uses a Natural
wheel.
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in Voice Command Tree
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
Help Command
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
would like to.”
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase the beep.
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply push NOTE:
button on your steering wheel and say a
the
• You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your phone to
command or say “help.” All Uconnect® Phone sescomplete this procedure.
button on the radio
sions begin with a push of the
control head.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
or
button on your steerYou can also push the
ing wheel when the system is listening for a command
and be returned to the main or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
1. You can do either of the following:
a. Press the SETTINGS hard-key, page down to the
“Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key, press it and you will
see the Paired Phones screen. If there are no paired
phones you will see <Empty> as the first device
name.
b. Press the MORE hard-key, then press the “Phone”
soft-key and you will go to the Uconnect® Phone
main screen. Press the “Settings” soft-key. If there
are no phones currently paired a pop-up will
appear. If you select Yes you will go the Paired
Phones screen, if you select No you will return to
the Uconnect® Phone main menu.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
2. At the Paired Phones screen press the “Add Device” 5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled Audio Device. When prompted on the device,
soft-key and a pop-up with instructions will appear.
select the “Uconnect®” device and enter the PIN.
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, 6. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting.
select the “Uconnect®” device and enter the PIN.
4. When the pairing process has successfully completed, 7. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite device. Selecting Yes will make
this is your favorite phone. Selecting Yes will make
this device the highest priority. This device will take
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired devices within range.
precedence over other paired phones within range.
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
1. Press the PLAYER hard-key to begin.
2. Touch the “Source” soft-key.
NOTE: If No is selected, device priority is determined by
the order in which it was paired. The latest device paired
will have the higher priority.
3. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
You can also use the following VR command to bring up
a list of paired audio devices.
4. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
• “Show Paired Audio Devices.”
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
5. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
1. Press the SETTINGS hard-key.
Uconnect® Phone will automatically connect to the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within 2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
range. If you need to choose a particular Phone or Audio 3. Select the Phone or Audio Device.
Device follow these steps:
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Disconnect
1. Press the SETTINGS hard-key.
Device” soft-key.
3. Touch to select the particular Phone or the “Phone/ Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
Audio” soft-key and then an Audio Device.
1. Press the SETTINGS hard-key.
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Connect
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
Device” soft-key.
3. Select the Phone or Audio Device.
5. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Delete Device” soft-key.
5. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Press the SETTINGS hard-key.
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect®
website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
follow the procedure in the “VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS” section.
3. Select a different Phone or Audio Device then the
currently connected device.
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
4. At the Options pop-up screen touch the “Make Favorphone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for
ite” soft-key; you will see the chosen device move to
example, after you start the vehicle.
the top of the list.
2. Touch the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key.
5. Touch the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect® Phone.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone, • Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availnames) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availphonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone Book
able for use.
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile 3. Once Emergency is touched, the “Edit” soft-key appears. Touch the “Edit” soft-key and you will be given
phone is accessible.
the choice to Edit Number or Reset to Default.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be 4. Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the task.
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transPhone Call Features
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
The following features can be accessed through the
phone connection.
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
Emergency And Towing Assistance
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
The 911/Help numbers can only be altered. These can not plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
be deleted or the names can not be changed.
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
To change the 911/Help number follow these steps.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
1. Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
screen.
with Uconnect® Phone.
2. Touch the “911/Help” soft-key. Touch the appropriate
• Redial
listing to alter, Emergency for example.
• Dial by touching in the number
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Number, Call by 2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial, or Call Back)
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
• Mobile Phonebook
• Recent Call Log
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
NOTE: All of the above operations except Redial can be
Call Controls
done with one call or less active.
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
Dial By Saying A Number
features:
1. Press the
button to begin.
• Answer
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
• End
say “Dial 248-555-1212.”
• Ignore
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial 248-555-1212.
• Hold/unhold
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
• Mute/unmute
1. Push the “Phone”
button on your steering wheel
• Transfer the call to/from the phone
to begin.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Swap two active calls
Recent Calls
• Join two active calls together
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
Touch-Tone Number Entry
1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key.
2. Touch the “Dial” soft-key.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
• Incoming Calls
• Outgoing Calls
• Missed Calls
• All Calls
4. Use the numbered soft-keys to enter the number and
These can be accessed by touching the recent calls soft-key
touch “Call.”
on the Phone main screen.
To send a touch tone using Voice Recognition (VR), press
button while in a call and say “1234#” or you You can also press the
button and say “Show my
the
can say “Send Voicemail Password” if Voicemail pass- incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming
word is stored in your mobile phonebook.
calls will be displayed.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing”,
“Recent” or “Missed.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys- only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
tem, if on, and will display a pop-up showing Answer or Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
button on Progress
Ignore. Press the Answer soft-key or the
the steering wheel to accept the call.
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Uconnect® Phone will then interrupt the
vehicle audio system, if on, and will display a pop-up
button
showing Answer, Ignore or Transfer. Press the
to place the current call on hold and answer the
incoming call.
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
press the
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call
is in progress. Or you can place a call on hold by
touching the “Hold” soft-key on the Phone main
screen, then dial a number from the dialpad, recent
calls or from the phonebooks. To go back to the first
call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this section.
To combine two calls, refer to “Join Calls” in this
section.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Toggling Between Calls
the far end, a call on hold may not become active
automatically. This is cell phone-dependent.
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
button until you hear a single beep, Redial
press the
indicating that the active and hold status of the two
1. Touch the “Redial” soft-key, or press the
button
calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on
and after the “Listening” prompt and the following
hold at a time. Also you can press the “Swap” soft-key
beep, say “Redial.”
on the Phone main screen.
2. The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
Join Calls
was dialed from your mobile phone.
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the “Join Calls” button on the Phone main Call Continuation
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
Call Termination
switched to OFF.
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the “End”
button. Only the active call(s) will be • After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
soft-key or the
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
terminated and if there is a call on hold, it will become
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
the new active call. If the active call is terminated by
cessation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Uconnect® Phone Features
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
reachable:
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
area.
number for your area.
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
for the mobile phone directly.
follows:
Emergency Assistance
• Press the
button to begin,
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
and Mexico.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect® Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the
Uconnect® Phone.
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
Working With Automated Systems
If you need roadside/towing assistance:
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
• Press the
button to begin,
• After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assistance.”
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is or automated customer service line. Some services rebased on the country where the vehicle is purchased quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
(1-800-528-2069 for the U.S., 1-800-363-4869 for Canada, that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
55-14-3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outWhen calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
side Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
Group LLC 24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on the
button and say the word
touchscreen or press the
24-Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For
Voice Mail Calling
example, if required to enter your PIN followed with
button and
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can press the
say, “Send 3 7 4 6 #.” Saying “Send” followed by a
with Automated Systems”.
number, or sequence of numbers, is also to be used for
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
navigating through an automated customer service • Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
center menu structure, and to leave a number on a
use of this feature.
pager.
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phonebook entry and/or Last Name as “Voice Password,” then
button and say “Send Voicemail
if you press the
Password,” the Uconnect® Phone will then send the
corresponding phone number associated with the
phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth®.
These additional symbols will be ignored when dialing
a numbered sequence.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The
button can be used when you wish to skip part
of a prompt and issue your voice command immediately. For example, if a prompt is asking “There are
NOTE:
two numbers with the name John. Say the full name”
button and say, “John Smith”
• The first number encountered for that contact will be you could push the
to
select
that
option
without
having to listen to the rest
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
of
the
voice
prompt.
ignored.
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Response Length
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
Detailed Voice Response Length.
1. Press the MORE hard-key, then touch the “Settings”
soft-key.
2. Touch the “Display” soft-key, then scroll down to
Voice Response Length.
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by touching the box
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
indicate your selection.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
WARNING!
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Chrysler Group LLC
strongly recommends that you use extreme caution
when using any device or feature that may take your
focus off the road or your hands off the steering
wheel. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use
of any handheld device while driving, encourage the
use of voice-operated systems when possible and
that you become aware of applicable laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you
of your phone and network status when you are attemptYou can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
ing to make a phone call using Uconnect® Phone. The
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
status is given for network signal strength and phone
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
battery strength.
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth® mobile phone, the audio will be played through your
vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work
the same as if you dial the number using voice a
command.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect®
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle Phone or vice versa, press the “Transfer” button on the
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa- Phone main screen.
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
audio.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
mute the Uconnect® Phone simply touch the “Mute”
button on the Phone main screen.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
• Low road noise
• Smooth road surface
Voice Command
• Fully closed windows
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
• Dry weather condition
provide at least ½ inch (1 cm) gap between the
overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
NOTE:
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac• Speak normally without pausing, just as you would
cents, the system may not always work for some.
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
• When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
during a Voice Command period.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
Performance is maximized under:
not in motion is recommended.
• Low-to-medium blower setting
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
• Low-to-medium vehicle speed
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Lo- •
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
•
entries are not similar.
•
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
•
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred.”
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
• Dry Weather Conditions
• Even though international dialing for most number • Operation From The Driver’s Seat
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
number combinations may not be supported.
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect® Phone
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Power-Up
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth® ON mode.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Voice Tree
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• You can replace “4” with any message number shown
on the screen.
• You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send • If your phone does not support phonebook download
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
or call log download over Bluetooth® than these
which phone number you want to send a message to
commands will return a response that the contact does
for John Smith.
not exist in the phonebook.
• You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or • Available Voice Commands are shown in bold face and
“Other.”
underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
• You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing General Information
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
• Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect® RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile following conditions:
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth®.
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
• You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
• This device must accept any interference received, • Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John
Smith’s Mobile”).
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N)
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav
• Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”).
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in- • View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls”,
“Show Outgoing calls”, “Show missed Calls”, “Show
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone alRecent Calls”).
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone.
• Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”).
Uconnect® Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features:
Screen Activated Features
• Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith’s • Dialing via Keypad using the touchscreen.
Mobile” or, “Dial 248 555-1212”).
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks displayed on the touchscreen.
• Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are For Uconnect® customer support:
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
• U.S. residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or call
• Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
1-877-855-8400.
• Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
• Sending a text message via the touchscreen.
• Canadian Residents - visit www.UconnectPhone.com or
call, 1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
• Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device via the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
touchscreen.
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
• Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access for private conversation.
to connect to them quickly.
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only in
safe driving conditions following all applicable laws,
including laws regarding phone use. Your attention
should be focused on safely operating the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in an accident causing
serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your Bluetooth®
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect® features
Bluetooth® technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other without
wires or a docking station, so Uconnect® Phone works no
matter where you stow your mobile phone (be it your
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is turned
on and has been paired to the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone.
The Uconnect® Phone allows up to ten mobile phones or
audio devices to be linked to the system. Only one linked
(or paired) mobile phone and one audio device can be used
with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
Uconnect® Voice Command Button
Button is
The Uconnect® Voice Command
only used for “barge in” and when you are
already in a call and you want to send Tones
or make another call.
The
button is also used to access the Voice Commands for the Uconnect® Voice Command features if
your vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect®
Voice Command section for direction on how to use
button.
the
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehicles audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
Uconnect® Phone Button
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
Button is used to knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
The Uconnect® Phone
enter the phone mode and make calls, show switch), if so equipped.
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view phonebook etc., When you press the button you will
hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following comPhone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mobile.”
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect® Phone prompts. There are two general meth- • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
ods for how Voice Command works:
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mosay each part of the command when you are asked for
bile.”
it. For example, you can use the compound command
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
guide you to complete the task.
can break the compound command form into two
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
“John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone
guided through the available options.
works best when you talk in a normal conversational
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
meters away from you.
prompt.
Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
Your Uconnect® Phone Voice system uses a Natural
question to which the user can respond without pressing
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
button on your steering
the “Voice Command”
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in wheel.
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
Voice Command Tree
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
would like to.”
Help Command
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen- the beep.
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply push
button on your steering wheel and say a
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was the
command or say “help.” All Uconnect® Phone sesrequested but the specific name was not recognized.
button on the radio
sions begin with a push of the
control head.
Natural Speech
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Cancel Command
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
you will be returned to the main menu.
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
or
button on your steer- NOTE:
You can also push the
ing wheel when the system is listening for a command
• You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your mobile
and be returned to the main or previous menu.
phone to complete this procedure.
• The vehicle must be in PARK.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
1. Press the “Phone” soft-key on the screen to begin.
2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Mobile Phone Pairing
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter
the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
• If “No” is selected, touch the “Settings” soft-key
from the Uconnect® Phone main screen.
• Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
• Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®
enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the
phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the
Uconnect® screen.
• See step 4 to complete the process.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in progress screen Pair Additional Mobile Phones
while the system is connecting.
1. Touch the “Settings” soft-key from the Phone main
screen.
2. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone,
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect®
screen.
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting.
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
precedence over other paired phones within range.
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
Mobile Phone Pairing Progress
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was system, a pop-up will appear.
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® enpriority.
abled audio device. When prompted on the device,
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up
enter the PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
6. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
• “Show Paired Phones”
while the system is connecting.
• “Connect My Phone”
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
1. Touch the “Player” soft-key to begin.
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
7. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite device. Selecting “Yes” will make
this device the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within range.
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the
3. Touch the “Bluetooth®” soft-key to display the Paired
device priority is determined by the order in which it was
Audio Devices screen.
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher
4. Touch the “Add Device” soft-key.
priority.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
You can also use the following VR command to bring up 4. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
a list of paired audio devices:
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
• “Show Paired Phones”
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
• “Connect My Phone”
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paires Audio Devices”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
button on the touchscreen.
Audio Device After Pairing
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
Uconnect® Phone will automatically connect to the highdevice name.
est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within
range. If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio 4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
Device follow these steps:
5. Press the “Disconnect Device” button on the touchscreen.
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Sources” 6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
button on the touchscreen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the particular 1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
Audio Device.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
2. Press the “Pair Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices” 5. Press the “Make Favorite” button on the touchscreen;
you will see the chosen device move to the top of the
button on the touchscreen.
list.
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name for a different Phone or Audio Device 6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
than the currently connected device.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
Uconnect® website, UconnectPhone.com, for supported
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices” phones.
button on the touchscreen.
• To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
follow the procedure in the “VOICE RECOGNITION
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
QUICK TIPS” section.
device name.
5. Press the “Delete Device” button on the touchscreen.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Automatic download and update of a phone book, if • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transphone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
example, after you start the vehicle.
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
to the Uconnect® Phone.
There are three ways you can add an entry to your
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- Favorite Phonebook.
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest 1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if availtouch and hold a favorite button on the top of the
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is availphone main screen.
able for use.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select phone• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
book from the Phone main screen, then select the
phone is accessible.
appropriate number. Touch the + next to the selected
number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up
select “Add to Favorites.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
the + on that selected entry. When the Options pop-up
appears, touch “Add from Mobile.” You will then be
asked which contact and number to choose from your
mobile phonebook. When complete the new favorite
will be shown.
Phonebook Favorites
NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
3. From the Phone main screen, select phonebook. From
the phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” soft-key
and then select the + soft-key located to the right of the
phonebook record. Select an empty entry and touch
Add From Mobile
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Remove A Favorite
1. To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the
Phone main screen.
2. Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
then touch the + Options soft-key.
3. Touch the + next to the Favorite you would like to
remove.
Remove From Favorites
4. The Options pop-up will display, touch “Remove from
Favs.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorite numbers
can only be altered. These cannot be deleted and the
names cannot be changed.
3
To change the Emergency or Towing Assistance numbers
follow these steps.
1. Touch the “Phonebook” soft-key from the Phone main
screen.
2. Touch the “Favorites” soft-key. Scroll to the bottom of
the list to locate the Emergency and Towing Assistance
Favorites.
Emergency And Towing Assistance Favorites
5. The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose
3. Touch the + Options soft-key.
between Editing the number or resetting the number
4. Touch the + next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
to default.
altered.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Call Features
• Mobile Phonebook
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan.
For example, if your mobile service plan provides threeway calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone. Check with your mobile service provider for the features that you have.
• Recent Call Log
Dial By Saying A Number
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial 151-1234-5555.”
• SMS Message Viewer
1. Push the “Phone”
to begin.
button on your steering wheel
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number 151-1234with Uconnect® Phone.
5555.
• Redial
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
• Dial by pressing in the number
1. Push the “Phone”
button on your steering wheel
• Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
to begin.
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
• Favorites
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number associated Touch-Tone Number Entry
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen.
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
2. Press the “Dial” button on the touchscreen.
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call 3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
features:
• Answer
• End
• Ignore
• Hold/unhold
• Mute/unmute
• Transfer the call to/from the phone
• Swap two active calls
• Join two active calls together
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
enter the number and press “Call.”
To send a touch-tone using Voice Recognition (VR), push
button on your steering wheel while in a
the “VR”
call and say “Send 1234#” or you can say “Send
Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is stored
in your mobile phonebook.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Incoming Calls
Recent Calls
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the • Outgoing Calls
following call types:
• Missed Calls
• All Calls
These can be accessed by touching the “recent calls”
soft-key on the Phone main screen.
button and say “Show my
You can also press the
incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming
calls will be displayed.
You can also press the
button and say “Show my
recent calls” from any screen and the All calls screen
will be displayed.
Recent Calls
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,”
“Recent” or “Missed.”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys- only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
button on the steering wheel Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
tem. Push the “Phone”
to accept the call. You can also press the “answer” Progress
button on the touchscreen or press the caller ID box.
You can place a call on hold by pressing the “Hold”
button on the Phone main screen, then dial a number
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
call waiting that you normally hear when using your to “Join Calls” in this section.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
button on the Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
mobile phone. Push the “Phone”
steering wheel, or press the “answer” button on the
During an active call, press the “Hold” button on the
touchscreen or caller ID box to place the current call on
Phone main screen.
hold and answer the incoming call.
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Toggling Between Calls
Redial
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), Press the “Redial” button on the touchscreen, or press the
and after the “Listening” prompt
press the “Swap” button on the Phone main screen. Only “Phone” button
and the following beep, say “Redial.”
one call can be placed on hold at a time.
button to toggle The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that was
You can also press the “Phone”
between the active and held phone call.
dialed from your mobile phone.
Join Calls
Call Continuation
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
hold), press the “Join Calls” button on the Phone main Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
switched to OFF.
NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the “Phone” system until the phone becomes out of range for the
button or the “end” button on the touchscreen. Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to press the
Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there is “transfer” button on the touchscreen when leaving the
vehicle.
a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
Call Termination
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Uconnect® Phone Features
NOTE:
Emergency Assistance
• The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the
touchscreen.
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
number for your area.
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
area.
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
• The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
follows:
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
button to begin.
1. Press the
for the mobile phone directly.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will
instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
and Mexico.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect® Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the
Uconnect® Phone.
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
If you need roadside/towing assistance:
1. Push the
button to begin.
NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased
(1-800-521-2779 for the U.S./Canada, 55-14-3454 for Mexico
City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in
Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24-Hour
“Roadside Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty
Information Booklet and on the 24-Hour Roadside Assistance Card.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep, Working With Automated Systems
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assistance.”
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phonebook entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail
button and say
Password”, then if you push the
“Send Voicemail Password” the Uconnect® Phone will
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
then send the corresponding phone number associnormally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
ated with the phonebook entry, as tones over the
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
phone.
button and say the word
touchscreen or push the
“Send” then the sequence you wish to enter. For NOTE:
example, if required to enter your PIN followed with • The first number encountered for that contact will be
button and
a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can push the
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
say, “Send 3 7 4 6 #.” Saying “Send” followed by a
ignored.
number, or sequence of numbers, is also to be used for
navigating through an automated customer service • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
center menu structure, and to leave a number on a
pager.
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time Voice Response Length
out settings that are too short and may not allow the It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
use of this feature.
Detailed Voice Response Length.
• Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by 1. Press the “More” button on the touchscreen (where
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth®.
available), then press the “Settings” button on the
These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing
touchscreen.
a numbered sequence.
2. Press the “Display” button on the touchscreen, then
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
scroll down to Voice Response Length.
The
button can be used when you wish to skip part
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by pressing the box
of a prompt and issue your voice command immedinext to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
ately. For example, if a prompt is asking “There are
indicate your selection.
two numbers with the name John. Say the full name”
button and say, “John Smith” Phone And Network Status Indicators
you could push the
to select that option without having to listen to the rest Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you
of the voice prompt.
of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using Uconnect® Phone. The
status is given for network signal strength and phone
battery strength.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
WARNING!
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. Chrysler Group LLC
strongly recommends that you use extreme caution
when using any device or feature that may take your
focus off the road or your hands off the steering
wheel. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use
of any handheld device while driving, encourage the
use of voice-operated systems when possible and
that you become aware of applicable laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while driving.
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth® mobile phone, the audio will be played through your
vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work
the same as if you dial the number using voice a
command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
mute the Uconnect® Phone simply press the “Mute”
button on the Phone main screen.
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans- Voice Command
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone • For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
provide at least ½ inch (1 cm) gap between the
from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect®
overhead console (if equipped) and the mirror.
Phone or vice versa, press the “Transfer” button on the
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Phone main screen.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
you.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile • Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during
a voice command period.
phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
Performance is maximized under:
• Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
• Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
• Low Road Noise
• Smooth Road Surface
• Fully Closed Windows
• Dry Weather Condition
Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Even though the system is designed for many languages • Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
and accents, the system may not always work for some.
When navigating through an automated system such as • Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking the • Low Road Noise
digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
• Smooth Road Surface
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not store names in
your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion. • Fully Closed Windows
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate • Dry Weather Conditions
is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say • Operation From The Driver’s Seat
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to
a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not
the Uconnect® Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Voice Text List
Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth® to use
NOTE: Uconnect® Phone SMS is only available when the
this feature. If the Uconnect® Phone determines your
vehicle is not moving.
phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over
Bluetooth® the “messaging” button will be grayed out
and the feature will not be available for use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Once a message is received and viewed or listened to,
you will have the following options:
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will • Send a Reply
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
• Forward
• Call
Send Messages Using Soft-Keys:
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
a new message:
1. Touch the “Phone” soft-key.
2. Touch the “messaging” soft-key then “New Message.”
Voice Text Reply
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Touch one of the 18 preset messages and the person Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
you wish to send the message to.
button.
1. Press the
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile.”
3. After the system prompts you for what message you
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List.” There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
button and
interrupt the system by pressing the
saying the message you want to send.
Preset Message List
4. If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
which number you would like to have the message sent.
5. Press “Send” or “Cancel.”
After the system confirms that you want to send your
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
4. I can’t talk right now.
5. Call me.
6. I’ll call you later.
7. I’m on my way.
8. Thanks.
9. I’ll be late.
10. I will be <number> minutes late.
11. See you in <number> minutes.
Preset Message List
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes.
2. No.
3. Okay.
12. Stuck in traffic.
13. Start without me.
14. Where are you?
15. Are you there yet?
16. I need directions.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
17. I’m lost.
18. See you later.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be re-established by switching the mobile
phone OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Voice Tree
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
6. Send dial tones for automated systems is available
while a call is active. This is an example that uses a
You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
Phonebook Record named “Voicemail Password.”
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you 7. Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but
which phone number you want to send a message to
only the first number encountered in a contact name
will be sent. For example if there is a number stored in
for John Smith.
the Home and Work numbers for the contact “VoiceYou can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
mail password” only the Home number will be sent.
“Other.”
8. If your phone does not support phonebook download
You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
commands will return a response that the contact does
not exist in the phonebook.
You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
9. Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that
These commands can be used during a phone call after
have been pre-loaded in the phonebook. Commands
such as “Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assispushing the Uconnect® Voice Command button on
tance” will call the corresponding number stored with
the steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted
while the VR session is active.
those contacts.
NOTE:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
5. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone number
supported by your Mobile phone.
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send 6. You can replace “4” with any message number shown
on the screen.
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to
7. If your phone does not support phonebook download
for John Smith.
or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
commands will return a response that the contact does
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
not exist in the phonebook.
“Other.”
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
4. Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect®
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth®.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
3
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
VOICE COMMAND
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
radio, disc player, SD Card, USB/iPod® and
the party responsible for compliance could void the
SiriusXM Travel Link.
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command
system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
• This device must accept any interference received,
the Voice Command system to recognize user voice
including interference that may cause undesired opcommands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking
eration.
or a raised voice level.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
If a command is not spoken a second time, the system
will respond with an error and give some direction as
what can be said based on the context you are in. After
three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR
session will end.
Pressing the Uconnect® Voice Command
button while
the system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The
system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can
say a command. This will become helpful once you start
When you press the Uconnect® Voice Command
button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to learn the options.
to give a command.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two “Help.”
responses:
• I didn’t understand
• I didn’t get that, etc.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The system will best recognize your speech if the win- Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sendows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
set to low.
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear available commands, press the Uconnect® Voice The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
button and say “Help.” You will hear requires more information from the user it will ask a
Command
question to which the user can respond without pressing
available commands for the screen displayed.
the Uconnect® Voice Command
button.
Natural Speech
Uconnect® Voice Commands
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out The Uconnect® Voice Command system understands
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah” two types of commands. Universal commands are availand “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I able at all times. Local commands are available if the
supported radio mode is active.
would like to.”
Start a dialogue by pressing the Uconnect® Voice ComThe system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
button.
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly mand
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Changing The Volume
Source
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command To switch to the audio source, say “Change source to
Disc” for example. This command can be given in any
button.
mode or screen:
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command system is speaking. Please note the volume
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session In
Radio/Player Modes
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when
a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect® Voice
button.
Command
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Tree
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
NOTE:
1. You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM.”
2. You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite
station name received by the radio.
3. You can replace “8” with any other satellite channel
number received by the radio.
4. You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
types.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
4. VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
based on the music metadata contained on the
1. You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
loaded/connected device.
podcast and audio book names with any corresponding names on the current device that is playing.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
2. You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is
currently playing. Command is only available when
CD is playing.
NOTE:
3. Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod® is connected and playing.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
3. You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or
1. You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
“Show ski info” to get other forecasts.
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines.”
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
2. You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams.”
NOTE:
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
NOTE:
1. Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
2. You can replace “Player” with “Radio,” “Navigation,”
“Phone,” “Climate,” “More” or “Settings.”
3. Navigation commands only work if equipped with
Navigation.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
NOTE:
SEATS
1. You can also say “Find City,” “Find Favorite,” “Find Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Play by Category,” “Find Play by Name,” “Find Re- vehicle.
cently Found,” “Where to?” or “Go Home.”
2. You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant,” “Fuel,”
“Transit,” “Lodging,” “Shopping,” “Bank,” “Entertainment,” “Recreation,” “Attractions,” “Community,” “Auto
Services,” “Hospitals,” “Parking,” “Airport,” “Police Stations,” “Fire Stations,” or “Auto Dealers.”
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats — If Equipped
On models equipped with power seats, the switch is
located on the outboard side of the seat near the floor.
Use this switch to move the driver’s seat up or down,
forward or rearward or to recline the seatback.
NOTE: The passenger’s seat will move up or down,
forward or rearward.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seat Control
2 — Seatback Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Reclining The Seatback
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
(Continued)
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
increase or decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch
upward or downward to raise or lower the lumbar
support.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or impede
its ability to move as it may cause damage to the seat
controls. Seat travel may become limited if movement
is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward or rearward to
Power Lumbar Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Heated Seats — If Equipped
WARNING! (Continued)
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
The front driver and passenger heated seats are operated
using the Uconnect® System.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Front Heated Seat Operations — Uconnect® 8.4/8.4
Nav
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of the
Uconnect® display.
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key
once to select HI-level heating. Press the softkey a second time to select LO-level heating.
Press the soft-key a third time to shut the
heating elements OFF.
Controls Soft-Key
Heated Seats Soft-Keys
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt Rear Heated Seats
within two to five minutes.
On vehicles equipped with rear heated seats, the seats
When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will closest to the doors are heated. The controls for these
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes seats are located on the rear of the center console.
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the You can choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber
normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
system will automatically switch to LO-level after a use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that LO and none for OFF.
time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating
Press the switch once to select HI-level heating.
the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatiPress the switch a second time to select LOcally after a maximum of 45 minutes.
level heating. Press the switch a third time to
Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start
shut the heating elements OFF.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the If the HI-level heating is selected, the system will autodriver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on matically switch to LO-level heating after approximately
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system. 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your number of indicators illuminated changes from two to
Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
one, indicating the change. Operation on the LO-level Front Ventilated Seat Operation — Uconnect®
setting also turns OFF automatically after approximately 8.4/8.4 Nav:
45 minutes.
Press the “Controls” soft-key located on the bottom of the
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt Uconnect® display.
within two to five minutes.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
small fans that draw air from the seat surface through
fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep the driver
and front passenger cooler in higher ambient temperatures.
The ventilated seats can be operated using the
Uconnect® System.
Controls Soft-Key
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Press the “Driver” or “Passenger” seat soft-key once to
select HI-level ventilation. Press the soft-key a second
time to select LO-level ventilation. Press the soft-key a
third time to shut off the seat ventilation.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Ventilated Seats Soft-Keys
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
3
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the AHR.
The AHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Active Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The center head restraint has two adjustable positions, up
or down. When the center seat is being occupied the head
restraint should be in the raised position. When there are
Push Button
no occupants in the center seat the head restraint can be
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint, and
push downward on the head restraint.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE: These loops can be tucked away when not in use.
Adjustment Button
NOTE: The outboard head restraints are not adjustable.
Rear Seatback Loop
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
Folded Rear Seatback
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
3
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons: The (S)
button, which is used to activate the memory save
function and the (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters. One RKE transmitter can be linked to memory
position 1 and the other transmitter can be linked to
memory position 2.
Memory Seat Switches
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE:
NOTE: Saving a new memory profile will erase an • Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
existing profile from memory.
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory profile.
To create a new memory profile, perform the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
• The Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock feature
Place the ignition into the RUN position.
can be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System,
Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferrefer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
Instrument Panel” for further information.
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column [if
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
equipped], and radio station presets).
Transmitter To Memory
Press and release the SET (S) button on the memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
switch.
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
Within five seconds, press and release the MEMORY UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
button 1 or 2. The Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) (if equipped) will display which memory position has been set.
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you
cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC.
must select the “Memory To FOB” feature through the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transin “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
mitter within 10 seconds.
information.
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the following: NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
memory settings by following steps 1-4 above and press1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ing the UNLOCK button (instead of LOCK) on the RKE
ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless transmitter in Step 4.
Enter-N-Go™).
Memory Position Recall
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2). The system
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
will recall any stored settings for this profile. Wait for
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
the system to complete the memory recall before
in PARK, a message will display in the EVIC (if
continuing to Step 3.
equipped).
3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release
To recall the memory settings for driver 1, press
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door or the
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 1.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the telescopic steering column (if equipped) stop moving. A
memory settings will be recalled with a Passive Entry delay of one second will occur before another recall can
Unlock into the driver’s door using the Key Fob linked to be selected.
position 1.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available With Memory Seat
To recall the memory setting for driver 2, press Only)
MEMORY button number 2 on the driver’s door or the
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
memory position 2.
vehicle.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, the
The distance the driver’s seat moves depends on where
memory settings will be recalled with a Passive Entry
you have the driver’s seat positioned when you cycle the
Unlock into the driver’s door using the Key Fob linked to
vehicles ignition to the OFF position.
position 2.
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
MEMORY buttons (S, 1, or 2) on the driver’s door during
Keyless Enter-N-Go™), the driver’s seat will move
a recall. When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
about 2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver’s seat
adjustable pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and
position is greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm)
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
forward of the rear stop. The seat will return to its Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
previously set position when you place the ignition Entry and Easy Exit position.
into the ACC or RUN position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
with Keyless Enter-N-Go™), the driver’s seat will the programmable features in the Uconnect® system.
move to a position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
stop if the driver’s seat position is between 0.9 in and Instrument Panel” for further information.
2.7 in (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set posi- TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
tion when you place the ignition in the ACC or RUN Two latches must be released to open the hood.
position.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
of the instrument panel.
driver’s seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
or Easy Entry.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open 8 in (20 cm)
approximately and then drop it. This should secure
both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood
is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Hood Release Lever
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights and fog lights.
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off Automatic Headlights Only)
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on, When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
position.
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable FeaNOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
will come on in the automatic mode.
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
provides increased forward lighting at night by automatlens will cause the system to function improperly.
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
from high beams to low beams until the approaching to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
vehicle is out of view.
dealer.
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
NOTE:
Headlight Time Delay
• Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
The Daytime Running Lights will turn On the first time
If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch the vehicle is shifted out of PARK, and remain On unless
the Parking Brake is applied. Upon returning to the
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
PARK position, the DRLs will turn Off. DRLs will turn
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
Off when the ignition is switched OFF.
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable usvehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
ing the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instruinformation.
ment Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights,
switch.
either press the headlight switch a second time or turn off
the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
Fog Light Switch
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Multifunction Lever
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the EVIC
(if equipped) and a continuous chime will sound if the
vehicle is driven more than 1 mi (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lane Change Assist
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overthe detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash head console.
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
released.
Front Map/Reading Lights
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to
pass position for more than 15 seconds, the high beams Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
will shut off.
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
second time. The lights will also turn on when the Courtesy Lights
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
pressed.
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time.
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Courtesy Lights
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ambient Light — If Equipped
Interior Lights
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibilTo protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
ity of the floor and center console area.
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either turn the
ignition to the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Ambient Light
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
equipped).
Dimmer Controls
3
Dimmer Controls
Instrument Panel Dimmer
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dome Light Position
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, EVIC (if equipped), and radio
when the position lights or headlights are on.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is Mist Feature
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
and then turn off.
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
continue to operate until you release the multifunction
lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
OFF position when not using the system.
3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Transmission in NEUTRAL Position — When the
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windmoved out of the NEUTRAL position.
shield.
NOTE: Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inmay reduce Rain Sensing performance.
formation.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
following conditions:
NOTE:
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
3
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect® System.
Touch the “Controls” soft-key then touch the “Heated
Wheel” soft-key to turn on the heated steering wheel.
Press the “Heated Wheel” soft-key a second time to turn
the heated steering wheel off.
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Controls Soft-Key
Heated Steering Wheel Soft-Key
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
WARNING! (Continued)
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
(Continued)
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away
from the driver to provide improved position with the
steering wheel.
The switch is located on the front side of the driver’s seat
cushion side shield.
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control System is on. The following messages will be displayed on
vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to be
adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjustable
Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).
NOTE:
• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full
pedal travel.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find
the best possible seat/pedal position.
• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you
can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Under- ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
information.
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
3
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — RES +
3 — SET 4 — CANCEL
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator light in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will
illuminate. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF
button a second time. The Cruise Indicator light will turn
off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed memory.
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed memory.
To Set A Desired Speed
To Resume Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
To Increase Speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of To Decrease Speed
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
U.S. Speed (mph)
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
continue to increase until the button is released, then
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
the new set speed will be established.
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
• Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a
the new set speed will be established.
2 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 2 km/h.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 2 km/h
continue to increase until the button is released, then
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
the new set speed will be established.
button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
vehicle set speed.
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
moderate hills is normal.
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility
to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead;
and, most importantly, brake operation to ensure
safe operation of the vehicle under all road conditions. Your complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
• Can only apply a maximum of 40% of the vehicle’s
braking capability, and will not bring the vehicle
to a complete stop.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
(Continued)
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode is for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional information, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode” in this section.
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The system will not react to preceding vehicles.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1 — DISTANCE SETTING
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
4 — CANCEL
5 — ON/OFF
6 — MODE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension modifications to the NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise conditions:
Control.
• When you apply the brakes.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When the parking brake is set.
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE
20 mph (32 km/h).
or NEUTRAL.
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) dis- • When pushing the RES + button without a previously
set speed in memory.
plays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive To Activate
Cruise Control Off.”
Push and release the ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in
the EVIC displays “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF
button again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) OFF
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have a collision. Always
leave the system off when you are not using it.
3
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
ACC Set
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system will not be controlling the distance be- To Cancel
tween your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle The system will disable ACC without erasing the memory
speed will only be determined by the position of the if:
accelerator pedal.
• You softly tap the brake pedal.
• You depress the brake pedal.
• You press the CANCEL switch.
• The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (25 km/h).
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
Driver Override
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS off, To Turn Off
ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
• You push and release the ON/OFF button.
• You turn OFF the ignition.
To Resume Speed
Press the RES + button and release. Then remove your
foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the
last set speed.
NOTE: You can resume ACC from a minimum of
20 mph (32 km/h).
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Cancelled
3
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pressing the RES + button.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
U.S. Speed (mph)
• RES + button once will result in a 1 mph increase in set
speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• RES + button once will result in a 2 km/h increase in
set speed. Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an increase of 2 km/h.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the EVIC display.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 2 km/h
pressing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
U.S. Speed (mph)
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
flected in the EVIC display.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
NOTE:
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
button is released. The decrease in set speed is rewill automatically slow the vehicle.
flected in the EVIC display.
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
• The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25% of
the vehicle’s braking capability and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1 (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC.
Distance Set 3 (long)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
3
Distance Set 2 (medium)
Distance Set 1 (short)
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To change the distance setting, press the Distance button • The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph
and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance
(25 km/h) and the system automatically disengages
setting adjusts between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1
itself.
(short).
• The distance setting is changed.
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the • The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed auto- The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; howmatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of ever, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
the set speed.
necessary.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set ACC system applies the brakes.
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately
apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle ahead.
3
Brake Alert 3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Brake Alert 2
Brake Alert 1
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a target
vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
turn signal. In locations with left hand drive traffic, Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “ACC”
Overtake Aid is active only when passing on the left or “Cruise” is highlighted in the EVIC. Status of the ACC
or Cruise is also displayed in the menu line.
hand side of the Target vehicles.
When a vehicle goes from a location with left hand drive
traffic to a location with right hand drive traffic, the ACC
system will automatically detect traffic direction. In this
condition, Overtake Aid is active only when passing on
the right side of the Target vehicle. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the right
turn signal. In this condition the ACC system will no
longer provide Overtake Aid on the left side until it
determines that the vehicle has moved back to a location
with left hand drive traffic.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
Press and release the SELECT (right arrow) button to
display the following information:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
• When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
ACC SET
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument • When ACC is set, the set speed will display.
cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The set speed will continue to display in place of the Display Warnings And Maintenance
odometer reading when changing the EVIC display
“Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
while ACC is set.
The ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC
warning will display when conditions temporarily limit
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
system performance. This most often occurs at times of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC
• Set Speed Change
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
• Distance Setting Change
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the
EVIC will display “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
• System Cancel
Vehicle” and the system will deactivate.
• Driver Override
The “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” message
• System Off
can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
• ACC Proximity Warning
snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has
• ACC Unavailable Warning
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is
• The EVIC will return to the last display selected after not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
NOTE: If the ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of • If the sensor is damaged due to a collision, see your
Vehicle” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
authorized dealer for service.
Control is still available. For additional information refer
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
section.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
vehicle behind the lower grille.
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- simply reactivating it.
tant to note the following maintenance items:
NOTE: Installing a vehicle front-end protector or an
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recomsensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage mended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit ACC
the sensor lens.
operation.
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so ACC Unavailable Warning
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “Adaptive
require a sensor realignment.
Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable”, there may be a
3
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Adding A Trailer Hitch
The weight of a trailer/hitch may affect the performance
of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance
following the installation of a trailer/hitch, or if the ACC
performance does not return to normal after removing
the trailer/hitch see your authorized dealer.
Offset Driving
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable Warning
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and Turns And Bends
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to In turns or bends, ACC may detect a vehicle ahead too
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
late or too early. This may cause your vehicle to brake late
or unexpectedly. Give extra attention in curves and be
ready to apply the brakes if necessary. Be sure to select an
appropriate speed while driving in curves.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turn Or Bend Example
3
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ACC may occasionally provide braking and/or a driver
alert that you consider unnecessary. This may be the system’s response to signs, guardrails, and other stationary
objects in a curve. This may also occur at the base of steep
hills. This is normal operation and your vehicle does not
require service.
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC Hill Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and it
may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until it
is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
3
Lane Changing Example
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Narrow Vehicles
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Narrow Vehicle Example
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
General Information
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
Classification Specifications:
47 C.F.R. Part 15
47 C.F.R Part 15.515
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a normal
(fixed speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The normal Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
To change modes, press the MODE button when the
system is in either the OFF, READY, or SET position.
While pressing the mode button, a chime alerts the driver
to the change of state from Adaptive Cruise Control to
normal Cruise Control. “Cruise Ready” will be displayed
if the system was in ACC READY or ACC SET position.
“Cruise Off” will be displayed if the system was in the
ACC OFF position. To switch back to Adaptive Cruise
Control mode, press the MODE button a second time.
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set A Desired Speed
U.S. Speed (mph)
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press the • Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 1 mph
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
speed.
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
changing speed, not the speedometer.
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Vary The Speed Setting
Metric Speed (km/h)
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, • Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 2 km/h
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
you can increase speed by pushing the RES + button.
button results in an increase of 2 km/h.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 2 km/h
you can decrease speed by pushing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 2 km/h.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
U.S. Speed (mph)
the new set speed will be established.
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
To Cancel
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
The system will disable normal Cruise Control without
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
erasing the memory if:
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then • You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
the new set speed will be established.
• You press the CANCEL button.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
3
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Resume
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
Press the RES + button and then remove your foot from The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides
the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set the driver with audible and visual warnings (within the
speed.
EVIC) when it detects a potential frontal collision. The
warnings are intended to provide the driver with enough
To Turn Off
time to react and avoid the potential collision.
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
memory if:
sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC),
• You push and release the ON/OFF button.
wheel speed sensors, i.e., to calculate a probable rear-end
collision. When the system determines that a rear-end
• You turn off the ignition.
collision is probable a warning message (both audible
• You switch off ESC.
and visual) will be displayed on the EVIC. When the
system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of
If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated,
you is no longer probable, the warning message will be
the system will return to the last driver setting (ACC or
deactivated.
Normal Cruise Control).
NOTE: The minimum speed for FCW activation is
10 mph (16 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Changing FCW Status
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting, this allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
gives you the most reaction time.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
The FCW feature can be set to far, set to near or turned off Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Set- from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for in front of you.
further information. The FCW Status Off, Near or Far will
be displayed in the Uconnect® display.
3
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
FCW Unavailable Warning
• In the “Off” setting FCW OFF will be displayed on the If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable, Service Required”, there may be a
Uconnect® display.
temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality.
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
driver after ignition shut down.
conditions, FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this
• FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over- occurs, try activating FCW again later, following a key
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher
rate of speed.
• If the FCW becomes disabled then a warning will
display on the EVIC screen.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® System Usage Precautions” for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ACC/FCW Unavailable, Service Required Warning
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
3
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 59 in ParkSense® Display
(150 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta- will turn ON indicating the system status.
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect®
System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). It provides
visual warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Park Assist Ready
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
3
Park Assist System Off
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Slow Tone
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fast Tone
Continuous Tone
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arcs
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2Slow
Second Tone
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
2 Slow
Flashing
1 Slow
Flashing
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the EVIC will display the
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled using the
Uconnect® System. The available choices are: Off, Sound
Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Rear Park Assist Audible Alerts
When the ParkSense® soft-key is pressed to disable the
system, the EVIC will display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for approximately five seconds.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
ParkSense® will turn off the Rear Park Assist audible
alert (chime) after approximately 3 seconds when an
obstacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and
brake pedal is applied.
3
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informaChime volume settings can be selected from the
tion. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
Uconnect® System.
system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will
The chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and display the “CLEAN PARK ASSIST”, ⬙SERVICE PARK
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. ASSIST⬙ or the “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” mesParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state sage for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this
condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
through ignition cycles.
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST” appears in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “CLEAN PARK If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK ASSIST
ASSIST”, “SERVICE PARK ASSIST” or “SERVICE PARK SYSTEM” appears in the EVIC, see an authorized dealer.
ASSIST SYSTEM” message for five seconds. Refer to
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not • When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damposition and ParkSense® is turned off, the EVIC will
age the sensors.
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
• ParkSense®, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
NOTE:
sounding a tone.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system oper- • Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
ating properly.
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
• When you turn ParkSense® off in DRIVE, the instrua false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
ment cluster will display ⬙PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
bumper.
OFF⬙ for five seconds. Furthermore, once you turn
3
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
30 cm from the rear fascia/ bumper. Failure to do so
can result in the system misinterpreting a close object
as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in the
EVIC.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the touchscreen display along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear.
The ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear License plate.
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle and will show separate zones that will help
indicate the distance to the rear of the vehicle. The
following table shows the approximate distances for each
zone:
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
3
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be driven
slowly when using ParkView® to be able to stop in
time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that
the driver look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
Turning ParkView® On Or Off — With
Touchscreen Radio
1. Turn the Radio on.
2. Push the “More” soft-key.
3
3. Push the “Settings” soft-key.
4. Push the “Safety & Driving Assistance” soft-key.
5. Push the check box soft-key next to “Parkview®
Backup Camera” to enable/disable.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink®) and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
visibility.
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartsecond time.
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Courtesy Lights
Sunglasses Bin Door
3
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds, or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
HomeLink® Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
3. Simultaneously push and hold both the HomeLink®
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re- NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
3
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
follow these steps:
light in view.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3. Simultaneously push and hold both the Homelink®
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
button you want to program and the hand-held transthe indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
mitter button.
not release the button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programcator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
steps.
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
from slow to rapid.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
before 1995.
and observe the indicator light.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transfollow these steps:
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do time-out in the same manner.
not release the button.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all door or gate motor.
remaining steps.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi- programming, plug it back in at this time.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
fully trained.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
follow these steps:
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
door may open and close while you are programming.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
not release the button.
and observe the indicator light.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/ The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and follow all the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
remaining steps.
Troubleshooting Tips
Using HomeLink®
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
To operate, push and release the programmed here are some of the most common solutions:
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitprogrammed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operater.
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
also be used at any time.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
Security
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
in your vehicle.
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
3
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
use a garage door opener without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet
at www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
General Information
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
(Continued)
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
3
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
(Continued)
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automatically from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a Pinch Protect Feature
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
held rearward again.
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
Closing Sunroof — Express
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstrucPress the switch forward and release it within one-half
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
release to Express Close.
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
the sunroof.
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Venting Sunroof — Express
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
3
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunshade Operation
Sunroof Maintenance
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens. the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is Ignition Off Operation
open.
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power sunroof switch
Wind Buffeting
will remain active for 45 seconds after the ignition switch
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
door will cancel this feature.
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain NOTE:
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
sunroof switch will remain active for up to approxithe rear windows open, then open the front and rear
mately ten minutes after the ignition switch is turned
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
cancel this feature.
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
• The Ignition Off time is programmable using the
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are three 12 Volt (13 Amps) electrical power outlets
on this vehicle. The power outlets are protected by a fuse.
Insert a cigar lighter or accessory plug into the power
outlets for use to ensure proper operation.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR® knob
and element must be used.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps) power
rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
3
300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The front 12 Volt power outlet has power available only
when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position.
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicles not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.
The center console outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Front Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301
3
Center Console Power Outlet
There is also a 12 Volt power outlet located on the back of
the center console for rear passengers. This power outlet
has power available only when the ignition is placed in
the ACC or RUN position.
Rear Center Console Power Outlet
302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel &
Power Outlet Console Rear
2 — #38 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
(Continued)
3
304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
Front Cupholders
Retractable Cover
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 305
Press the “Cold” symbol once to turn on the cupholder;
Your vehicle may be equipped with heated and cooled press the symbol a second time to turn the cupholder off.
cupholders. The cupholders are designed to help keep Press the “Hot” symbol once to activate the cupholder;
press the symbol a second time to turn off the cupholder.
warm beverages warm and cold beverages cool.
Heated And Cooled Cupholders — If Equipped
WARNING!
Heated And Cooled Cupholder Switches
When using the cupholder in the “Hot” position,
avoid contact with the heated portion of the cupholder in order to reduce the possibility of burns.
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injuries, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise particular care in order to prevent serious burn injury.
Keep the cupholder free of debris or stray objects
when operated in the Heat position.
3
306 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Cupholders
Lighted Cupholders — If Equipped
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient
access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a
resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
On some vehicles the rear cupholders are equipped with
a light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Seat Cupholders
Light Ring In Rear Cupholder
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 307
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel.
3
Opened Glove Compartment
Glove Compartment
308 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Inside the center console armrest, there is a removable
There is an open cubby bin located forward of the shift upper storage tray that can be slid forward/rearward on
rails for access to the lower storage area. This tray has an
lever.
integrated coin holder, along with additional area for
Two separate storage compartments are also located small items like an ipod or phone. Below the upper tray,
underneath the center console armrest.
the lower storage compartment is made for larger items,
like CDs and tissue boxes. In addition, the 12 Volt power
outlet, USB and Aux jack are located here.
Console Features
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Center Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 309
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.
Cargo Area — Vehicles Equipped With 60/40
Split-Folding Rear Seat
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Front Door Trim Storage
3
310 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 311
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control. Press this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10
minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .315
▫ Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped . . . . .336
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Oil Change Due . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .317
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ SRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . . .344
▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
▫ Turn Menu OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵 Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect® 4.3 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . .
. . . .381
. . . .382
. . . .383
. . . .383
▫ Customer Programmable Features —
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Uconnect® 8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ SRT Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Hard-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH
▫ Soft-Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . .
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . .
. . .384
. . .384
. . .385
. . .385
. . .386
. . .391
. . .393
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Hazard Switch
— Uconnect® System
— Climate Control Hard Controls
— Glove Compartment
7 — ESC Off Switch
8 — Uconnect® System Hard Controls
9 — SD Memory Card Slot
10 — Power Outlet
11 — CD/DVD Slot
12 — Storage Compartment
13
14
15
16
17
18
—
—
—
—
—
—
Engine Start/Stop Button
Trunk Release Button
Dimmer Controls
Hood Release
Headlight Switch
Paddle Shifters
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
4. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
5. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam headThis indicator will illuminate when the park
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever forlights or headlights are turned on.
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
3. Turn Signal Indicators
6. Odometer Display/Electronic Vehicle Information
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn Center (EVIC) Display
signal when the turn signal lever is operated. Odometer Display
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle The odometer display shows the total distance the veis driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal hicle has been driven.
on, a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
for a defective outside light bulb.
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the mileage was
before the repair or service. It is a good idea for you to
make a record of the odometer reading before the repair/
service, so that you can be sure that it is properly reset, or
that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer
must be reset at zero.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
EVIC display. It displays the gear position of the automatic transmission.
NOTE:
• You must apply the brakes before shifting from
PARK.
• The highest available transmission gear is displayed
in the lower right corner of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) whenever the Electronic
Range Select (ERS) feature is active. Use the +/selector on the shift lever to activate ERS. Refer to
“Automatic Transmission” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
7. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the low tire pressure telltale.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
tires.)
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
CAUTION! (Continued)
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
8. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
to continue to function properly.
an Onboard Diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission conCAUTION!
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
the ON/RUN position, before engine start. If the bulb
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
warning have been established for the tire size ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using re- Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may
placement equipment that is not of the same size, illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause be serviced if the light stays on through several of your
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will
drive normally and will not require towing.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
9. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
10. Fuel Door Reminder
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
Fuel Filler Door is located on the left side of the
vehicle.
11. Fuel Gauge
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
12. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” 14. Sport Suspension
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
The light will illuminate when Sport or Track
further information.
mode is selected. When Sport mode is selected,
13. Sport Shifting
the EVIC will display “Sport Mode Active
(Suspension)”. This mode provides perforThis light will illuminate when Track mode is
mance based tuning with improved handling through an
selected. When Track Mode is selected, the
EVIC will display “Track Mode Activated (Sus- electronic controlled damping system. This system reduces body roll and pitch in many driving situations
pension and Transmission)”. In addition to
including cornering, acceleration and braking. When
SPORT suspension, Track mode also affects transmission
Track Mode is Selected, the EVIC will display “Track
shifting in either Auto or Manual mode. Refer to
Mode Activated (Suspension and Transmission)”. In ad“AutoStick” in “Starting And Operating” for further
dition to SPORT suspension, Track mode also affects
information. The transmission has a sportier, more agtransmission shifting. Refer to “AutoStick” in “Starting
gressive shift pattern. In Manual mode, the transmission
And Operating” for further information.
will hold gear at redline during manual shifting (console
shifter or paddle switches).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
15. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
16. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it 17. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system Light — If Equipped
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Conthe conventional brake system will continue to operate
trol (ESC) is off.
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock 18. Brake Warning Light
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
This light monitors various brake functions,
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
including brake fluid level and parking brake
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
dropped below a specified level.
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by 19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apThe “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
when the ignition switch is turned to the
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
inspected by an authorized dealer.
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction InThe light also will turn on when the parking brake is dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi- running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
tion.
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on will illuminate and the chime will sound. Refer to
momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
to ON/RUN.
NOTE:
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
21. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant
temperature. Any reading within the normal
range
indicates
that the engine cooling system is operat• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
ing
satisfactorily.
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperamaneuver that caused the ESC activation.
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
20. Seat Belt Reminder Light
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“260” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “260” and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call an
authorized dealer for service.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The EVIC Menu items consists of the following:
• Fuel Economy
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Vehicle Speed
instrument cluster.
• Trip Info
• Tire Pressure
• Vehicle Info
• SRT
• Turn Menu OFF
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Trip Info, Vehicle
Speed, and Turn Menu OFF) and sub-menus.
DOWN Arrow Button
Press and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
Vehicle Info and Trip Info sub-menus (Fuel
Economy, Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Cruise, Messages, Trip Info, Vehicle Speed, and Turn Menu OFF) and
sub-menus.
RIGHT Arrow Button
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
Press and release the RIGHT arrow button for
access to main menus, sub-menus or to select a
personal setting in the setup menu. Press and
Press and release the UP arrow button to scroll
hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds
upward through the main menu and Vehicle
to reset features.
Info and Trip Info sub-menus (Fuel Economy,
UP Arrow Button
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
into several categories:
previous menu or sub-menu.
• Five Second Stored Message
BACK Button
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
The EVIC display consists of three sections:
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
1. The top line where compass direction and outside condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the ⬙Messages⬙ main menu item. As long
temperature are displayed.
as there is a stored message, an ⬙i⬙ will be displayed in the
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
messages are displayed.
message type are ⬙Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out⬙
and ⬙Low Tire Pressure⬙.
3. The reconfigurable telltales section.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
The main display area will normally display the main • Unstored Messages
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
menu. The main display area also displays ⬙pop up⬙ condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
of this message type are ⬙Turn Signal On⬙ (if a turn signal EVIC White Telltale Lights
is left on) and ⬙Lights On⬙ (if driver leaves the vehicle). This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
⬙Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar⬙ and ⬙Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start⬙.
• Five Second Unstored Messages
• Shift Lever Status
The shift lever status “P,R,N,D,5,4,3,2,1” are displayed
indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “5,4,3,2,1”
indicate the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature has
been engaged and the gear selected is displayed. For
further information on ERS, refer to “Starting And Operating”
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five • Electronic Speed Control ON
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. ExThis light will turn on when the electronic
amples of this message type are ⬙Memory System Unspeed control is ON. For further information,
available - Not in Park⬙ and ⬙Automatic High Beams On⬙.
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Electronic Speed Control SET
EVIC Amber Telltale Lights
This light will turn on when the electronic This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tellspeed control is SET. For further information, tales. These telltales include:
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Under- • Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
standing The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
This light warns the driver of a potential colli• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON
sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the
driver to take action in order to avoid the
This light will turn on when the ACC is ON.
collision. For further information, refer to
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET
• Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
This light will turn on when the ACC is SET.
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The fuel is added.
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
• Trunk Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that the trunk
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
may be ajar.
operating and needs service. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
Your Vehicle.”
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the
EVIC Red Telltale Lights
light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound for
telltales include:
four minutes when this light turns on.
• Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Charging System Light
cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the
light does not come on during starting, have the system
This light shows the status of the electrical chargchecked by an authorized dealer.
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition is first cycled ON and remain on briefly as a bulb • If a problem is detected, the light will come on while
check. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential electrical
devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If the
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
charging system light remains on, it means that the
• If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authoauthorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the
rized dealer.
light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required. You may experience reduced
• If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
and your vehicle may require towing.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
• Engine Temperature Warning Light
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condiThis light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge apwith severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
proaches H, or 260°F, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
light turns on, safely pull over and stop the
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
pass H, or 260°F, a continuous chime will occur until the run the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
engine is allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
When the shift up indicator (+) is shown on the display,
the GSI is advising the driver to engage a higher gear.
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) — If Equipped
The Gear Shift Indicator (GSI) system is enabled on vehicles with a manual transmission, or when a vehicle with
an automatic transmission is in manual shift mode. The
GSI provides the driver with a visual indication within the
GSI Shift Up (+) Indicator
EVIC when the recommended gear shift point has been
reached. This indication notifies the driver that changing When the shift down indicator (-) is shown on the
display, the GSI is advising the driver to engage a lower
gear will allow a reduction in fuel consumption.
gear.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position. To
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
GSI Shift Down (-) Indicator
The GSI indicator in the EVIC remains illuminated until MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system
the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions return (after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform
to a situation where changing gear is not required to the following procedure:
improve fuel consumption.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine.)
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times • Miles Per Gallon (MPG)
within 10 seconds.
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE Trip Computer functions.
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the The Trip Functions mode displays the following informaOFF/LOCK position.
tion:
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you Average Fuel Economy/ECO Fuel Saver Mode — If
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not Equipped
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
Fuel Economy
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Fuel “RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
Economy” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press history information will be erased, and the averaging will
the SELECT button. Press and release the UP/DOWN continue from the last fuel average reading before the
buttons until one of the following Fuel Economy func- reset.
tions displays in the EVIC:
There is an ECO icon between the Compass and Outside
• Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
Temperature info at the top of the EVIC display. This icon
will appear whenever the Multi-Displacement System
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
(MDS) (if equipped) allows the engine to operate on four to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
cylinders, or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner. until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
Miles Per Gallon (MPG)/Liters Per 100 km
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
(L/100km)
Distance To Empty (DTE)
The Miles Per Gallon (MPG)/Liters Per 100 km (L/
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
100km) feature displays instantaneous fuel economy in a
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
bar graph below the DTE, this function cannot be reset.
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
Press the BACK button to return to the main menu.
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT Vehicle Speed
button.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle Speed” displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of SELECT button. Press the SELECT button to display the
current speed in mph or km/h. Pressing the SELECT
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
button a second time will toggle the unit of measure
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km) between mph or km/h.
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle To Reset The Display
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
EVIC.
displayed. Press and release the SELECT button once to
clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all
Trip Info
resettable functions, press and hold the SELECT button
Trip A
for two seconds. The current display will reset along with
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last other functions.
reset.
Units
Trip B
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last displays highlighted in the EVIC and press the SELECT
reset.
button. The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
Elapsed Time
units of measure. To make your selection, scroll up or
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then
when the ignition is in the ACC position. Elapsed time press and release the SELECT button until a check-mark
will increment when the ignition is in the ON/RUN appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has
position.
been selected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
The Performance Features include the following:
SRT
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the performance pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
can jeopardize the users safety or the safety of others.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
• Braking Distance
• 1/8 Mile
• 1/4 Mile
• Instantaneous G-Force
• Peak G-Force
To access, press and release either the UP or DOWN
arrow button until “SRT” appears in the EVIC, then press
and release the SELECT button. Press the UP or DOWN
button to cycle through the features. Press the SELECT
button to select a feature. Press and hold the SELECT
button to reset best time.
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Braking Distance
Timers
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was
depressed.
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within • This feature will only function when applying the
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
10 seconds.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at • Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will appear • The word “READY” will display when conditions are
when conditions are met for the event to begin.
met for the event to begin.
• The screen will revert back to “Please come to a • The distance and speed measurements display while
complete stop, Not Ready”, if the vehicle fails to reach
the event is taking place.
60 mph (100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
• The time will continue to display until the SELECT
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a combutton is pressed or the vehicles is brought to a stop.
plete stop.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
• The distance and speed measurements will continue to Instantaneous G-Force
display until the conditions are met for another event
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force
to be recorded.
(lateral and longitudinal).
• Pressing the SELECT button will clear the current run Peak G-Force
and prepare the cluster to record a new run.
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile
values (two lateral and two longitudinal).
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
• When a force greater than zero is measured, the
vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) within 25 seconds.
display will update the value as it climbs. As the
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will display when
• Pressing and holding the SELECT button for five
conditions are met for the event to begin.
seconds will clear the peak force values.
• 0.0s will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8 mile
(1/4 mile) in less then 25 seconds.
• The time will continue to display until the vehicle is
brought to a stop.
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
• Oil Pressure
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
available information displays, then press SELECT to
display any one of the following choices.
Displays the actual oil pressure.
• Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• AWD Status — If Equipped
• Trans Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
• Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
• Tire Pressure
Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING
Displays a vehicle ICON with four wheels highlighted THE SPARE TIRE).
and ⬙AWD⬙ if All Wheel Drive is active. Displays a
Messages #
vehicle ICON with two wheels highlighted and ⬙RWD⬙ if
Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons.
All Wheel Drive is inactive.
This feature shows the number of stored warning mes• Oil Temperature
sages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button
Displays the actual oil temperature.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
will allow you to see what the stored messages are. control knob located on the right side of the Climate
Pressing the BACK button takes you back to the Main Controls in the center of the instrument panel. Turn the
control knob to scroll through menus and change settings
Menu.
(i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the center of the control knob one or
Turn Menu OFF
more times to select or change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button. Push- Soft-Keys
ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display. Pushing
any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the Soft-Keys are accessible on the Uconnect® touchscreen.
menu back.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
4.3 Settings
Uconnect® SETTINGS
In this mode the Uconnect® system allows you to access
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of soft and
programmable features that may be equipped such as Dishard keys located on the center of the instrument panel
play, Clock, Safety/Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
that allows you to access and change the customer Heated Seats, Engine Off Operation, Compass Settings, Auprogrammable features.
dio, Phone/Bluetooth® and SIRIUS Setup through hard-keys
and soft-keys.
Hard-Keys
Hard-Keys are located on the left and right side of the NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
Uconnect® 4.3 screen. In addition, there is a Scroll/Enter time.
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the ⬙Settings⬙ hard-key to access the Settings screen,
use the Page Up/Down soft-keys to scroll through the
following settings. Touch the desired setting soft-key to
change the setting using the description shown on the
following pages for each setting.
Uconnect® 4.3 Soft-Keys
1 — Uconnect® 4.3 Settings Hard-Key
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch
• Brightness
the English, French (Français) or Spanish (Español) softTouch the “Brightness” soft-key to change this display. key to select the language preferred. Then touch the
When in this display, you may select display brightness arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information
with the headlights on and the headlights off. Adjust the will display in the selected language.
brightness with the + and – setting soft-keys or by
• Units
selecting any point on the scale between the “+” and “–”
soft-keys. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Touch the “Units” soft-key to change this display. When
in this display, you may switch the EVIC, odometer, and
• Mode
navigation system (if equipped) between US and Metric
Touch the “Mode” soft-key to change this display. When units of measure. Touch “US” or “Metric” then touch the
in this display, you may select one of the auto display arrow back soft-key. As you continue, the information
settings. To change Mode status press and release the will display in the selected units of measure.
“Day,” “Night” or “Auto” soft-key, then touch the arrow
• Voice Response
back soft-key.
Touch the “Voice Response” soft-key to change the Voice
• Language
Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Touch the “Language” soft-key to change this display. Length, press and release the “Brief” or “Long” soft-key.
When in this display, you may select one of three Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Display
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Touchscreen Beep
soft-key, adjust the hours and minutes using the up and
down soft-keys, select AM or PM, select 12 hr or 24 hr.
Touch the “Touchscreen Beep” soft-key to turn on or shut
Then touch the back arrow soft-key when all selections
off the sound heard when a touchscreen button (soft-key)
are complete.
is pressed. To change the Touchscreen Beep setting press
and release the “ON” or “OFF” soft-key, then touch the • Show Time Status
arrow back soft-key.
Touch the “Show Time Status” soft-key to change this
• Fuel Saver Display
display. When in this display, you may turn on or shut off
the digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show
Touch the “Fuel Saver Display” soft-key to turn the ECO
Time Status setting, press and release the “ON” or “OFF”
message (located in the instrument cluster display) on or
soft-key. Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
off. To make your selection, touch the “Fuel Saver Display” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch the • Sync Time — If Equipped
arrow back soft-key.
Touch the “Sync Time” soft-key to change this display.
When in this display, you may have the radio set the time
automatically. To change the Sync Time setting, press and
• Set Time
release the “ON” or “OFF” soft-key. Then touch the back
Touch the “Set Time” soft-key to change this display. arrow soft-key.
When in this display, you may select the time display
settings. To make your selection, touch the “Set Time”
Clock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Safety/Assistance
• ParkSense® — If Equipped
• Front Collision Warning — If Equipped
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the
ParkSense® status, touch and release the “Sound Only”
or “Sounds and Display” button. Then touch the arrow
back soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and
operating information.
Touch the “Front Collision Warning” soft-key to change
this display. The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature
can be can be set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The
default status of FCW is the Far setting. This means the
system will warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
gives you the most reaction time. To change the setting
for more dynamic driving, select the Near setting. This
warns you of a possible collision when you are much
closer to the vehicle in front of you. This allows for a
more dynamic driving experience. To change the FCW • Front ParkSense® Chime Volume — If Equipped
status, press and release the “OFF,” “Near” or “Far”
The ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be selected
button. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if equipped. The
For further information, refer to ”Adaptive Cruise Con- chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
Vehicle”.
To make your selection, touch the “ParkSense® Chime
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Volume” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the arrow back soft-key to return to the previous
menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
Touch the “Tilt Mirrors In Reverse” soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the outside
rearview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is
in the RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in
the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to
their previous position when the transmission is shifted
out of REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the “Tilt
Mirrors In Reverse” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.”
Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
Touch the “Blind Spot Alert” soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert
feature can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The
Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in Lights mode.
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors. When Lights & Chime mode
is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a
visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible
alert when the turn signal is on. When Off is selected, the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To
change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the “OFF,”
“Lights” or “Lights & Chime” soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped
Touch the “Rain Sensing” soft-key to change this display.
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
“Rain Sensing” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then
touch the arrow back soft-key.
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
and operating information. To make your selection, touch
the “Hill Start Assist” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.”
Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Lights
• Illuminated Approach
Touch the “Illuminated Approach” soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
will activate and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status, touch the “0,” “30,” “60” or “90” soft-key.
Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
• Headlights With Wipers
Touch the “Headlights With Wipers” soft-key to change
Touch the “Hill Start Assist” soft-key to change this this display. When this feature is selected, and the
display. When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights
(HSA) system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
are turned on. The headlights will also turn off when the
wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this
feature. To make your selection, touch the “Headlights
With Wipers” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then
touch the back arrow soft-key.
your selection, touch the “Daytime Running Lights”
soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch the back
arrow soft-key.
• Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped
Touch the “Steering Directed Lights” soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights
Touch the “Auto High Beams” soft-key to change this turn relative to a change in direction of the steering
display. When this feature is selected, the high beam wheel. To make your selection, touch the “Steering
headlights will deactivate automatically under certain Directed Lights” soft-key and select “ON” or ‘OFF.” Then
conditions. To make your selection, touch the “Auto High touch the back arrow soft-key.
Beams” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch • Flash Lights With Lock
the back arrow soft-key. Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™
— If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Touch the “Flash Headlights With Lock” soft-key to
change this display. When this feature is selected, the
Vehicle” for further information.
signal lights will flash when the doors are locked with the
• Daytime Running Lights — If Available
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature
Touch the “Daytime Running Lights” soft-key to change may be selected with or without the sound horn on lock
this display. When this feature is selected, the headlights feature selected. To make your selection, touch the “Flash
will turn on whenever the engine is running. To make
• Auto High Beams “SmartBeams™”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
Headlights With Lock” soft-key and select “ON” or is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s
door is opened. To make your selection, touch the “Auto
“OFF.” Then touch the back arrow soft-key.
Unlock On Exit” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.”
Doors & Locks
Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following
• Flash Lights With Lock
settings will be available.
Touch the “Flash Lights With Lock” soft-key to change
• Auto Lock
this display. When this feature is selected, the front and
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto- rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit(24 km/h). To make your selection, touch the “Auto ter. To make your selection, touch the “Flash Lights With
Unlock On Exit” soft-key, until a check-mark appears Lock” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF”. Then touch the
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. arrow back soft-key.
Touch the arrow back soft-key to return to the previous
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
menu.
Touch the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” soft-key to
• Auto Unlock On Exit
change this display. When this feature is selected, the
Touch the “Auto Unlock On Exit” soft-key to change this horn will sound when the remote start is activated. To
display. When this feature is selected, all doors will
unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
make your selection, touch the “Sound Horn With Re- On 1st Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmote Start” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then mitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s
doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected,
touch the arrow back soft-key.
all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
• Sound Horn With Lock
transmitter UNLOCK button.
Touch the “Sounds Horn With Lock” soft-key to change
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with Keyless Enter-Nthis display. When this feature is selected, the horn will
Go™ (Passive Entry) and the EVIC is programmed to
chirp when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
Unlock All Doors On 1st Press, all doors will unlock no
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your
matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is
selection, touch the “Sound Horn With Lock” soft-key
grasped. If Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is
and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch the arrow back
programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when
soft-key.
the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if
• Remote Door Unlock Order
Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is programmed,
Touch the “Remote Door Unlock Order” soft-key to touching the handle more than once will only result in
change this display. When Unlock Driver Door Only On the driver’s door opening. If Unlock Driver Door Only
1st Press is selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on On 1st Press is selected, once the driver door is opened,
the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) trans- the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to
mitter UNLOCK button. When Unlock Driver Door Only unlock all the doors (or use the RKE transmitter).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
• Memory Linked To FOB
• Passive Entry (Keyless Enter-N-Go™)
Touch the “Memory Linked to FOB” soft-key to change
this display. This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering
and exiting the vehicle, driver 1 and driver 2 last mode,
settings and presets. To make your selection, touch the
“Memory Linked to FOB” soft-key and select “ON” or
“OFF.” Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Touch the “Passive Entry” soft-key to change this display.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, touch the
“Passive Entry” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then
touch the arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Keyless EnterN-Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle.”
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set Heated Seats
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the • Auto Heated Seats — If Equipped
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
Touch the “Auto Heated Seats” soft-key to change this
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
display. When the temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C)
the Driver’s heated seat will turn on. To make your
selection, touch the “Auto Heated Seats” soft-key and
select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch the back arrow softkey.
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Engine Off Options
• Engine Off Power Delay
• Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped
Touch the “Engine Off Power Delay” soft-key to change
this display. When this feature is selected, the power
window switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if
equipped), DVD video system (if equipped), power
sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain
active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to
OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature. To
change the Engine Off Power Delay status, touch the “0
seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5 minutes” or “10 minutes”
soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
Touch the “Easy Exit Seats” soft-key to change this
display. This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when entering and
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, touch the
“Easy Exit Seats” soft-key, and select “ON” or “OFF.”
Then touch the arrow back soft-key. Refer to “Driver
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for further information.
• Headlight Off Delay
Touch the “Headlight Off Delay” soft-key to change this
display. When this feature is selected, the driver can
choose to have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or
90 seconds when exiting the vehicle. To change the
Headlight Off Delay status, touch the “0,” “30,” “60” or
“90” soft-key. Then touch the arrow back soft-key.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Compass Settings
• Variance
Touch the Variance soft-key to change this display. Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North
and Geographic North. To compensate for the differences, the variance should be set for the zone where the
vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
Compass Variance Map
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Lap•
Calibration
tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the Touch the “Calibration” soft-key to change this setting.
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
also calibrate the compass by touching the “ON” soft-key
and completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the CAL
indicator displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass
will now function normally.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
• Balance/Fade
Touch the “Balance/Fade” soft-key to change this disNOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and an play. When in this display, you may adjust the Balance
environment free from large metallic objects such as and Fade settings.
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
• Speed Adjusted Volume
etc.
Touch the “Speed Adjusted Volume” soft-key to change
this display. This feature increases or decreases volume
relative to vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted
• Equalizer
Volume, press the “OFF,” “1,” “2” or “3” soft-key. Then
Touch the “Equalizer” soft-key to change this display. touch the back arrow soft-key.
When in this display, you may adjust the Bass, Mid and • Surround Sound — If Equipped
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale Touch the “Surround Sound” soft-key to change this
between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back display. This feature provides simulated surround sound
arrow soft-key.
Audio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
mode. To make your selection, press the “Surround • Subscription Info
Sound” soft-key and select “ON” or “OFF.” Then touch
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
the back arrow soft-key.
limited time subscription to SIRIUS Satellite Radio with
your radio. Following the expiration of the free services,
Phone/Bluetooth®
it will be necessary to access the information on the
• Paired Devices
Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Subscription Information screen.
to the Uconnect® Supplement.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
SIRIUS Setup
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
• Channel Skip
the screen or visit the provider online.
SIRIUS can be programmed to designate a group of NOTE: SIRIUS Travel Link is a separate subscription.
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, touch the “Channel Skip” soft-key, select
the channels you would like to skip. Then touch the back
arrow soft-key.
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Once the setting is complete press the “Back Arrow”
soft-key to return to the previous menu or press the “X”
soft-key to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the
Press the “More” soft-key, then press the “Settings”
soft-key to display the menu setting screen. In this mode “Up” or “Down” arrow soft-keys on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
the Uconnect® system allows you to access programavailable settings.
mable features that may be equipped such as Display,
Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Display
Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off
After pressing the Display soft-key the following settings
Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®
will be available.
and SIRIUS Setup.
• Display Mode
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
When in this display you may select one of the auto
time.
display settings. To change Mode status, touch and
When making a selection, press the soft-key to enter the release the “Day,” “Night” or “Auto” soft-key. Then
desired mode. Once in the desired mode press and touch the back arrow soft-key.
release the preferred setting until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
8.4 Settings
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
• Display Brightness With Headlights ON
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to the language,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale • Units
between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
arrow soft-key.
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
between US and Metric units of measure. Touch “US” or
“Metric” until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
“–” setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the “+” and “–” soft-keys. Then touch the back • Voice Response Length
arrow soft-key.
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re• Set Language
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, touch the “Brief” or “Detailed” soft-key until a
When in this display, you may select one of three languages
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
and the navigation system (if equipped). Touch the “Set
to return to the previous menu.
Language” soft-key and then touch the desired language
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Touchscreen Beep
• Fuel Saver Display In Cluster — If Equipped
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (soft-key) is
pressed. Touch the “Touchscreen Beep” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
The “ECO” message is located in the instrument cluster
display, this message can be turned on or off. To make
your selection, touch the “Fuel Saver Display” soft-key,
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
Clock
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, touch the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Clock soft-key the following settings
will be available.
• Sync With GPS Time — If Equipped
When in this display, you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync with GPS Time
setting touch the “Sync with GPS Time” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, indicating that
the setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
• Set Time Hours
• Time Format
When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The
“Sync with GPS Time” soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to
adjust the hours up or down. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the “X”
soft-key to close out of the settings screen.
When in this display, you may select the time format
display setting. Touch the “Time Format” soft-key until a
check-mark appears next to the 12hrs or 24hrs setting,
indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Set Time Minutes
When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
“Sync with GPS Time” soft-key must be unchecked. To
make your selection touch the “+” or “–” soft-keys to
adjust the minutes up or down. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu or touch the “X”
soft-key to close out of the settings screen.
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting touch the “Show Time in Status Bar”
soft-key until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance soft-key
the following settings will be available.
4
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Front Collision Sensitivity — If Equipped
• ParkSense® — If Equipped
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be set to
Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default status of FCW
is the Far setting. This means the system will warn you of
a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you when
you are farther away. This gives you the most reaction
time. To change the setting for more dynamic driving,
select the Near setting. This warns you of a possible
collision when you are much closer to the vehicle in front
of you. This allows for a more dynamic driving experience. To change the FCW status, touch and release the
OFF, Near or Far button. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key.
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the
ParkSense® status, touch and release the Sound Only or
Sounds and Display button. Then touch the arrow back
soft-key. Refer to “ParkSense®” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
• ParkSense® Chime Volume
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Con- The ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be selected
trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your from the EVIC or Uconnect® System — if equipped. The
Vehicle”.
chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and
HIGH. The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM.
To make your selection, touch the ParkSense® Chime
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Volume soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
menu. ParkSense® will retain its last known configuration state through ignition cycles.
• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN
position and the transmission shift lever is in the REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, touch the Tilt Mirrors
In Reverse soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode.
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”
mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, touch the
Off, Lights or Lights & Chime soft-key. Then touch the
arrow back soft-key.
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key
to return to the previous menu.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
• ParkView® Backup Camera — If Equipped
on the windshield. To make your selection, touch the
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear Rain Sensing soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be • Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your and operating information. To make your selection, touch
selection, touch the ParkView® Backup Camera soft-key, the Hill Start Assist soft-key, until a check-mark appears
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. • Headlight Illumination On Approach
Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
menu.
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Lights
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
After pressing the Lights soft-key the following settings
touch the “+” or “–” soft-key to select your desired time
will be available.
interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to the
• Headlights Off Delay
previous menu.
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of
the amount of time the headlights remain on after the
engine is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay
setting, press the “Headlights Off Delay” button on the
touchscreen, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec, 60 sec or 90
seconds. A check-mark appears next to setting indicating
that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, touch the “Headlights With Wipers” softkey, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing
that setting has been selected. Touch the back arrow
soft-key to return to the previous menu.
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
• Steering Directed Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, touch the “Auto High Beams”
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu. Refer to
“Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
When this feature is selected, the headlights turn relative
to a change in direction of the steering wheel. To make
your selection, touch the “Steering Directed Lights”
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Available
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
touch the “Daytime Running Lights” soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• Flash Lamps With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked with the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
To make your selection, touch the “Flash Lamps with
Lock” soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
Doors & Locks
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch the
back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
After pressing the Doors & Locks soft-key the following
• Flash Lamps With Lock
settings will be available.
• Auto Lock
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h). To make your selection, touch the Auto
Unlock On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the exterior lamps will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,
touch the Flash Lamps With Lock soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
the previous menu.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, touch the Auto Unlock
On Exit soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Lock soft-key, until a checkmark appears next to setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to return to
the previous menu.
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With
Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is programmed touching the handle more than once will only
result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door first is
selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or
use RKE transmitter).
• Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, touch the Passive Entry soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
return to the previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N- Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
Go™” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle.” After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Personal Settings Linked To FOB — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Memory
Linked To FOB soft-key, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, showing that setting has been selected. Touch
the back arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
touch the Sound Horn With Remote Start soft-key, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, showing that setting
has been selected. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat return to the previous menu.
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set • Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
for further information.
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will
turn on. To make your selection, touch the Auto Heated
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seats soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting, • Engine Off Power Delay
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back
When this feature is selected, the power window
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
switches, radio, Uconnect® phone system (if equipped),
Engine Off Options
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to
After pressing the Engine Off Options soft-key the fol10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening
lowing settings will be available.
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the
• Easy Exit Seat
Engine Off Power Delay status touch the 0 seconds, 45
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to seconds, 5 minutes or 10 minutes soft-key. Then touch the
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the arrow back soft-key.
vehicle. To make your selection, touch the Easy Exit Seats • Headlight Off Delay
soft-key, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Touch the back When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
arrow soft-key to return to the previous menu.
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off
Delay status touch the + or - soft-key to select your
desired time interval. Touch the back arrow soft-key to
return to the previous menu.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Compass Settings
After pressing the Compass Settings soft-key the following settings will be available.
• Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the
instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Laptop
Computers and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass module is located, and it can cause interference with
the compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
4
Compass Variance Map
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Perform Compass Calibration
• Equalizer
Touch the “Calibration” soft-key to change this setting.
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and it may need to
be calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by
pressing the “ON” soft-key and completing one or more
360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting soft-keys or by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and – soft-keys. Then touch the back arrow
soft-key.
Audio
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as touch
directly on the desired setting.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
After pressing the Audio soft-key the following settings
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
will be available.
touch the Off, 1, 2 or 3 soft-key. Then touch the back
• Balance/Fade
arrow soft-key.
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
• Music Info Cleanup
• Paired Devices
This feature helps organize music files for optimized This feature shows which phones are paired to the
music navigation. To make your selection, touch the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
Music Info Cleanup soft-key, select On or Off followed by to the Uconnect® Supplement.
pressing the back arrow soft-key.
SiriusXM Setup
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
After pressing the “SIRIUS Setup” soft-key the following
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode. settings will be available.
To make your selection, touch the Surround Sound • Channel Skip
soft-key, select On or Off followed by pressing the back
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
arrow soft-key.
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
Phone/Bluetooth®
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” soft-key the fol- your selection, touch the “Channel Skip” soft-key, select
the channels you would like to skip followed by pressing
lowing settings will be available.
the back arrow soft-key.
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Subscription Information
SRT Performance Features
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen in order to resubscribe.
To access the SRT Performance Features, touch the “SRT &
More” soft-key then touch the “SRT Performance” soft-key.
Press the UP or DOWN soft-key to cycle through the
features. Press the feature soft-key to select that feature.
Touch the Subscription Info soft-key to access the Subscription Information screen.
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the limits
of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as measured
by the performance pages must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner, which can jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
WARNING!
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
The Performance Features include the following:
The following describes each feature and its operation:
• Timers
Home
• Engine Values
When selected, this screen allows you to choose Sport
Track mode.
• Digital Gauge Displays
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
• Braking Distance
• This mode provides performance based suspension
tuning with improved handling and acceleration
through an electronic controlled dampening system.
• 1/4 Mile (400 meter)
• This system reduces body roll and pitch in many
driving situations including cornering, acceleration
and braking.
• Instantaneous G-Force
Timers
• 1/8 Mile (200 meter)
• Peak G-Force
• Digital Speedometer
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h), 1/8 Mile (200 meter), 1/4 Mile
(400 meter)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h), 1/8
mile (200 meter) or 1/4 mile (400 meter).
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The feature will be “ready” when the vehicle speed is G-Force
at 0 mph (0 km/h).
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
• Soft-keys allow access to the current, best and last values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as
steering angle.
times recorded.
When a force greater than zero is measured, the display
will update the value as it climbs. As the G-Force falls,
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
the peak forces will continue to display.
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was
Gauges 1
depressed.
Braking Distance
• This feature will only function when applying the When selected, this screen displays the following values:
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Oil Temperature
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake Shows the actual oil temperature within the range of the
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a complete gauge.
stop.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
• Battery Voltage
• Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual battery voltage.
Shows the actual intake air temperature within the range
of the gauge.
Gauges 2
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Coolant Temperature
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
• Battery Voltage
Shows the actual coolant temperature within the range of
the gauge.
Shows the actual battery voltage.
• Oil Temperature
Engine
Shows the actual oil temperature within the range of the When selected, this screen displays miles per hour (mph),
gauge.
horsepower (hp), torque (ft/lb), oil pressure (psi) and
gear selector values.
• Transmission Temperature
Shows the actual transmission temperature within the
range of the gauge.
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Handling
HARMAN KARDON® Logic7® HIGH
When selected, this screen displays peak g-force, steering PERFORMANCE MULTICHANNEL SURROUND
SOUND SYSTEM WITH DRIVER-SELECTABLE
and yaw angles.
SURROUND (DSS) — IF EQUIPPED
Options
Your vehicle is equipped with a Harman Kardon® audio
When selected, this screen allows you to choose a stan- system with GreenEdge™ technology that offers superior
dard or customize display for your SRT home page.
sound quality, higher Sound Pressure Levels (SPL) and
reduced energy consumption. The new system utilizes
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL
proprietary amplifier and speaker technologies deliverThis feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be ing substantial increases in component and system efficiency levels.
plugged into the USB port.
The 12 Channel Class D GreenEdge™ high efficiency
amplifier is governed by a high voltage tracking power
supply and drives a 7.4-channel playback architecture.
The Harman Kardon® audio system offers the ability to
choose Logic 7® surround sound for any audio source.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® SuppleThe GreenEdge™ high-efficiency speaker designs ensure
ment Manual.
the system has higher SPL and a dramatic increase in
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
dynamic sound quality. The speakers are tuned for
maximum efficiency and perfectly matched to the amplifier output stage ensuring state of the art multi-seat
surround sound processing.
Logic7® multichannel surround-sound technology delivers an immersive, accurate sound-stage to every seating
position This surround effect is available for audio from
any source - AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or dashboard
AUX input; and is activated through Uconnect® radio
touchscreen. Refer to “Customer Programmable Features” under “Uconnect® SETTINGS” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
Selecting “Surround Sound” through the Uconnect®
radio activates the Harman Kardon® Logic7® multichannel surround-sound technology in your vehicle. Some
audio will sound better in DSS modes, others in Stereo
mode.
When in “Surround Sound” mode, balance is set automatically. Fader control is available in surround mode
but should be set to the center position for optimal
surround performance.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and The button located in the center of the left-hand control
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker will tune to the next preset station that you have proswitch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom grammed in the radio preset button.
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
CD Player
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once precautions:
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
surface.
seconds after the current track begins to play.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
wiping from center to edge.
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no 3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the 4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
center button will select the next available CD in the
or anti-static sprays.
player.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This system
can be operated through either the controls on the instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system display.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (RaUnder certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in dio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated display.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
General Overview
Hard-Keys
Hard-keys are located on the left and right side of the
Uconnect® 4.3 screen in the center of the instrument panel.
There are also hard-keys located below the Uconnect®
touchscreen.
4
Manual Climate Controls — Hard-Keys
(MTC System Shown)
Uconnect® 4.3 — Hard-Key
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Soft-Keys
Soft-keys are accessible on the Uconnect® system screen.
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Soft-Keys
Uconnect® 4.3 Manual Temperature Controls —
Soft-Keys
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Hard-Keys And 4. AUTO Operation Button
Soft-Keys)
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
1. MAX A/C Button
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
Press and release to change the current setting, the this function will cause the ATC to switch between
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to Operation” for more information.
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator 5. Front Defrost Button
will turn off.
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
2. A/C Button
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feaPress and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Performing this function will cause the ATC
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this to switch into manual mode. The blower speed may
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch increase when Defrost mode is selected. If the front
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. defrost mode is turned off the climate system will return
the previous setting.
3. Recirculation Button
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
indicator illuminates when ON.
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
4
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window 7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
turns off after 10 minutes.
control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
9. SYNC
Press the Sync soft-key to toggle the Sync feature On/Off.
The Sync indicator is illuminated when this feature is
enabled. Sync is used to synchronize the passenger
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Soft-Key
Changing the passenger temperature setting while in Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
Sync will automatically exit this feature.
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
10. Blower Control
area between the icons.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven 11. Modes
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
speeds can be selected using either hard-keys or soft-keys demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are
as follows:
as follows:
Hard-Key
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the knob counter-clockwise.
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
4
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located
below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount
of airflow from these outlets.
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
• Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. When
the defrost mode is selected, the blower level may
increase.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
12. Climate Control OFF Button
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
amount of air is directed through the defrost ON/OFF.
and side window demister outlets.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically Climate Control Functions
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
A/C (Air Conditioning)
time.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
time.
sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
15. Temperature Control (Uconnect® 4.3 Only)
NOTE:
Press the temperature soft-key to regulate the tempera• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,
ture of the air inside the passenger compartment. Moving
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but
the temperature bar into the red area, indicates warmer
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
temperatures. Moving the temperature bar into the blue
of the windows.
area indicates cooler temperatures.
4
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, Recirculation Control
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (loyou may wish to recirculate interior air by
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
the front of the radiator and through the condenser.
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
MAX A/C
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforNOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
mance.
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the feature may be unavailable (soft button greyed out). The
prior settings. The soft-key illuminates when MAX A/C Recirculation mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to
is ON.
improve window clearing operation. Recirculation will
be disabled automatically if this mode is selected. AtIn MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
tempting to use Recirculation while in this mode will
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
cause the LED in the control button to blink and then turn
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
off.
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
1. Press the AUTO hard-key or soft-key button (4) on the
the temperature, mode, and blower speed to provide
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
comfort as quickly as possible.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pasunits by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
senger temperature hard or soft control buttons (7, 8,
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in
13, 14). Once the desired temperature is displayed, the
this section of the manual.
system will achieve and automatically maintain that
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
comfort level.
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi- increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
Manual Operation Override
system to function automatically.
Automatic Operation
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation control.
4
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C is not recommended because it may cause window
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually fogging.
selected in Manual operation.
Vacation Storage
Operating Tips
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
suggested control settings for various weather conditions. conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
Summer Operation
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Window Fogging
Outside Air Intake
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side windows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be totally
• Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
periods, as fogging may occur.
NOTE:
• Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
4
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .408
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .408
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 䡵 AUTOSTICK® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or
Console Mounted Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 䡵 SPORT MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 䡵 LAUNCH MODE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .419
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . . .405 䡵 DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .422
䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .433
䡵 DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
▫ Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED. . .426
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
䡵 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .431
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Synchronizing ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .448
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .452
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
▫ Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . . .466
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .455
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456 䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .476
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .464
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .465
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
5
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release. . . . . . . . .482
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .484
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .484
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Key Fob
is in the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, press the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed
once, the EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle
Not In Park” message and the engine will remain
running. Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK
position, or it could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then press PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short presses in a row with the
vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain
in the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector
is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, RUN. If Engine Fails To Start
To change the ignition switch positions without starting
the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:
WARNING!
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position:
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
change the ignition to the ACC position.
3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition to the RUN position.
4. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition to the OFF position.
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine
has started, ignite and damage the converter and
vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
WARNING! (Continued)
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proceThe engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and grounded, three-wire extension cord.
hold it.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that is
located on the driver side of the Integrated Power Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you
should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission
is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Never leavechildren alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
• Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
Key Ignition Park Interlock
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in
the OFF position.
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.
You must press the brake pedal to move the shift lever
out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move the shift
lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
hundred miles (kilometers).
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
pedal must be pressed.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can
be made using the AutoStick® shift control (refer to
⬙AutoStick®⬙ in this section). Moving the shift lever to the
left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position, or tapping
one of the steering wheel-mounted shift paddles (-/+) (if
equipped), will manually select the transmission gear,
and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
the ignition to the OFF position before restarting.
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after
restarting the engine if the ignition is not cycled to the
OFF position first.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
Gear Ranges
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or vehicle in this range.
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
NOTE:
brake.
• After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to allow
the selected gear to engage before accelerating. This is
especially important when the engine is cold.
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult
to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if
the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your
foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly pressing the
brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those
in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should
never exit a vehicle while the engine is running.
Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, turn the
engine off, and remove the Key Fob. When the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked
in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
DRIVE (D)
SPORT (S) — If Equipped
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
This mode alters the transmission’s automatic shift
schedule for sportier driving. Upshift speeds are increased to make full use of available engine power. To
toggle between DRIVE and SPORT modes, touch the
SPORT button (on the Controls screen in the center touch
panel).
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
winds), use the “AutoStick®” shift control (refer to
“AutoStick®” in this section for further information) to
select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in the current gear until the vehicle is brought to a stop.
After the vehicle has stopped, the transmission will
remain in second gear regardless of which forward gear
is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Transmission Limp Home Mode
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomto be driven to an authorized dealer for service without mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
damaging the transmission.
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
dealer service is required.
following steps:
Overdrive Operation
1. Stop the vehicle.
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position. automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
• The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
5. Restart the engine.
• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
AUTOSTICK®
Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or
Console Mounted Shifter
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance.
5
This system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
mountain driving, and many other situations.
1 — (–) Shift Paddle
2 — (+) Shift Paddle
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
• If AutoStick® is engaged while in DRIVE mode, the
transmission will automatically shift up when maxiWhen the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, the
mum engine speed is reached.
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the five available gears. To engage AutoStick®, simply • If AutoStick® is engaged while in SPORT mode, the
tap the shift lever to the right or left (+/-) while in the
transmission will remain in the selected gear even
DRIVE position, or tap one of the steering wheelwhen maximum engine speed is reached. The transmounted shift paddles (+/-), if equipped. Tapping (-) to
mission will upshift only when commanded by the
enter AutoStick® mode will downshift the transmission
driver. Engine overspeed protection will be provided
to the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter
by fuel cut off at or near redline.
AutoStick® mode will retain the current gear. When
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
AutoStick® is active, the current transmission gear is
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will
displayed in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
display the current gear.
(EVIC) portion of the instrument cluster. In AutoStick®
mode, the transmission will shift up or down when (+/-) • The transmission will automatically downshift to first
is manually selected by the driver (using the shift lever,
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
or the shift paddles [if equipped]), unless an engine
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
lugging or overspeed condition would result. It will
vehicle is accelerated.
remain in the selected gear until another upshift or
downshift is chosen, except as described below.
Operation
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear.
Tapping (+), (at a stop) will allow starting in second
gear. Starting out in second gear is helpful in snowy or
icy conditions.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
of a vehicle speed.
• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is engaged.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick® is engaged.
To disengage AutoStick® mode, hold the shift lever to the
right or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if equipped)
until “D” is once again displayed in the instrument
cluster. You can shift in or out of the AutoStick® mode at
any time without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Automatic (Auto) Mode — This is the default position
when the vehicles ignition is first turned on. This
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic controlled
mode will give a sporty, but comfortable ride. Within
damping system. This system reduces body roll and pitch
this mode, the suspension will adapt to the vehicle
in many driving situations including cornering, accelerainputs, including vehicle speed, steering inputs, braktion and braking. There are three modes of operation:
ing and acceleration.
SPORT MODE
• Sport Mode — This mode is driver selectable when the
vehicle is placed in SPORT mode (press the CONTROLS button and then the SPORT button on the
display screen). The SPORT soft key can also be found
on the SRT Performance Page (press the SRT & MORE
button and the SRT Performance Page button then the
SPORT button on the display screen). This mode will
set suspension for maximum performance handling
and is intended for spirited driving.
NOTE: The SPORT setting will provide a firmer ride.
SPORT/TRACK Mode
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
• When SPORT mode is enabled, a shock symbol will • When TRACK mode is enabled, a flag symbol will
light up in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
light up in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Description” in “Understanding Your InstruCluster Description” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ment Panel” for further information.
• AUTO mode will provide a sporty comfortable ride, LAUNCH MODE — IF EQUIPPED
where as SPORT or TRACK will be a firmer, sportier
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system
suspension with better handling.
that is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum
• Track Mode — This mode includes SPORT suspension vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a
and affects transmission shifting in either “Auto” or form of traction control that manages tire slip while
“Manual” mode. Refer to “AutoStick” in “Starting launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
And Operating” for further information. In TRACK during race events on a closed course where consistent
mode, the transmission has a sportier, more aggressive quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The
shift pattern. In Manual mode, the transmission will system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver
hold gear at redline during manual shifting (console experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of this
shifter or paddle shifters).
feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc) conditions
may results in excess wheel slip outside this systems
control resulting in an aborted launch.
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Press the “ESC OFF” button a second time to put the
vehicle into Launch Control. The “ESC OFF” lamp will
• Launch control should not be used on public roads.
remain lit, and the cluster display will read “Launch
Always check track conditions and the surrounding
Control Enabled”.
area.
3. Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
• Launch Control is not available for the first 500 miles
4. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight.
of vehicle life.
Preconditions:
• Launch Control should only be used when the engine 5. Hold the brake and make sure the vehicle is in
“Drive”.
and transmission are at operating temperature.
• Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved 6. While holding the brake, rapidly apply the accelerator
road surfaces only. Use on slippery or loose surfaces
pedal to wide open throttle. The engine speed will
hold at approximately 1825 RPM for the quickest
may cause damage to vehicle components.
launch.
Launch Control is only available when the following
• Messages will appear in the cluster EVIC display to
procedure is followed:
inform the driver if one or more of the above
1. Press the “ESC OFF” button to put the vehicle into
conditions (3 through 6) have not been met.
ESC Partial mode. The “ESC OFF” lamp will illuminate in the cluster.
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
7. When conditions 3 through 6 have been met, the • The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer
cluster EVIC display will read “Launch Ready Release
moving in a straight line. ESC system continues in ESC
Full ON.
Brake”.
Release the brake and continue to hold wide open • The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change the system
throttle to launch.
to another mode. One press puts the ESC system into
ESC Full-On.
8. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches NOTE:
62 mph (100 kph), at which point the ESC system • After launch control has been aborted, the vehicle will
continues in ESC Full ON mode. Activating Launch
resort back to ESC Full ON.
Control again from this state will require pressing the
• Launch mode is not available within the first 500 miles
“ESC OFF” button twice. Repeat steps 3 through 8.
of engine break-in.
Launch control will abort before launch completion and
display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster under any the
following conditions:
• The accelerator pedal is released during launch. ESC
system continues in ESC Full ON.
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Traction
Acceleration
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the rear (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate, the
amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved
handling.
WARNING! (Continued)
away swiftly. Failure to follow this warning may result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Shallow Standing Water
Driving through water more than a few inches/centimeters
deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
damage to your vehicle.
and Warnings before doing so.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water is
flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing
water can wear away the road or path’s surface and
cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry your vehicle
(Continued)
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s
traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h)
when driving through standing water.
(Continued)
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Always check the depth of the standing water before
driving through it. Never drive through standing
water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims
mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving through
standing water. This will minimize wave effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
(Continued)
(Continued)
CAUTION!
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
POWER STEERING
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
The standard power steering system will give you good
does not in any way damage the steering system.
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
CAUTION!
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
Parking Brake
disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before
driving; failure to do so can lead to brake failure and
a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving
your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is
indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
axle.
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
of the stop.
related motor noises. These noises are the system perThese are all normal characteristics of ABS.
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self check occurs each time the
WARNING!
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or • The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can inby improperly installed or high output radio transclude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
mitting equipment. This interference can cause posdebris, or panic stops.
sible loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation
You also may experience the following when the brake
of such equipment should be performed by qualisystem goes into Anti-Lock:
fied professionals.
•
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
effectiveness and may lead to a collision. Pumping
short time after the stop).
makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that include Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist System
(BAS), and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All four
of these systems work together to enhance vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle may be equipped with Hill Start Assist
(HSA), Ready Alert Braking, and Rain Brake Support.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydraulic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
accurate signals for the computer.
Operating” for further information.
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Lock Differential
(BLD), controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel.
This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active
even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer
to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for
more information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
Brake Assist System (BAS)
This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
vehicle braking capability during emergency brake maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application
and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
can help reduce braking distances.
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
The “ESC Off” switch is located in the switch bank near
the bottom center of the instrument panel. To enter the
The ESC system has three available operating modes:
“Partial Off” mode, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
ESC On
switch and the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When- Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC ON again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC
ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will turn off.
situations. The ESC should only be turned OFF for NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
with snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
Partial Off
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the “ESC
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a Off” switch. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also mode is overcome, turn the ESC ON again by momenintended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This tarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESC and raises the while the vehicle is in motion.
threshold for ESC activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESC normally allows.
ESC Operating Modes
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated.
When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
chime will sound, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display in the vehicle odometer. Press and
release the TRIP ODOMETER button located on the
instrument cluster to clear this message. The “ESC OFF”
message may appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. To turn ESC ON again,
momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: The ⬙ESC OFF⬙ message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use into the PARK position from any position other than
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This
this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned will occur when the message was previously cleared.
OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, press and hold the
“ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is
stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a
Full Off
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the
ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. ⴖESC Offⴖ mode is intended for off-highway
or off-road use only.
NOTE: When the ESC is switched OFF, a feature of the
system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin
across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential.
If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel
and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction
when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch
to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily pressing the
“ESC Off” switch.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system will
not activate and slight rolling may occur. This could
cause a collision with another vehicle or object. Always
remember the driver is responsible for braking the
vehicle.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back- Towing With HSA
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when when pulling a trailer.
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
WARNING!
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
WARNING! (Continued)
• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Ready Alert Braking
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
Rain Brake Support
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake
Support is active, there is no notification to the driver and
no driver interaction is required.
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/
RUN position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the • The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mospeeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authomentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
ON/RUN position.
diagnosed and corrected.
• Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position, the ESC system will be ON even if it was
cycled off previously.
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop Tire Markings
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.
5
Synchronizing ESC
If the power supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or discharged), the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” may illuminate with
the engine running. If this should occur, turn the
steering wheel completely to the left and then to the right.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” should
go out. However, if the light remains on, have the ESC and
BAS checked at your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designaT145/80D18 103M.
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
NOTE:
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
— 01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire
Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
B-Pillar Location For Tire And Loading
Information Placard
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
spare tires.
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Loading
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
the weight referenced here.
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
Locate the statement “The combined weight of occusafely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
capacity calculated in step 4.
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
NOTE:
Determine the combined weight of the driver and
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followSubtract the combined weight of the driver and pasing table shows examples on how to calculate total
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
The resulting figure equals the available amount of
vehicle with varying seating configurations and numcargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg), and • For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) = 650 lbs [295 kg]).
(392 kg).
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1.
2.
3.
4.
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear paterratic and unpredictable steering response.
terns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier • Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
may look properly inflated even when they are under- of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
inflated.
temperature changes.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage. Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
CAUTION!
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always
reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent moisture
and dirt from entering the valve stem, which could
damage the valve stem.
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
WARNING!
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Code).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary bemeets the following criteria:
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
handling of your vehicle.
• The puncture is no greater than ¼⬙ (6 mm).
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
safety and handling of your vehicle.
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
driving conditions. For more information, contact a au- was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
thorized dealer. Summer tires do not contain the all not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
season designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
the tire sidewall.
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
tire inflation pressures.
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
Snow Tires
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states produring the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
checked before using these tire types.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Spare Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles NOTE: For vehicles equipped with TIREFIT instead of a
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation spare tire, please refer to “TIREFIT KIT” in “What To Do
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the In Emergencies” for further information.
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
CAUTION!
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi- Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor- Wheel — If Equipped
mation.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
tire rotation pattern.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
WARNING!
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. only. With these spares, do not drive more than
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” 50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/ tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
80D18 103M.
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip- spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
first opportunity.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
WARNING!
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Inspare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
first opportunity.
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Tire Spinning
Tread Wear Indicators
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or to help you in determining when your tires should be
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop- replaced.
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
5
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
factors including, but not limited to:
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Driving style
Replacement Tires
• Tire pressure
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
• Distance driven
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manuhigher, and summer tires typically have a reduced facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivatread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main- lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
“Tread Wear Indicators”. Refer to the Tire and Loading
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Broken
chains can cause serious damage. Stop the vehicle
immediately if noise occurs that could indicate
chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the
chain before further use.
• Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as
possible and then retighten after driving about ½
mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Use on rear wheels only.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
If driving conditions require tire chains for your vehicle,
use only chains that meet SAE type “Class S” specifications. In addition, only install tire chains on 245/45ZR20
size tires. Contact you local authorized dealership or tire
dealer for these size tires.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on the method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for use. Always use the lower suggested
operating speed of the chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacturer.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry smooth, quiet ride.
pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on method of installation, operating speed, and Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
conditions for usage.
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both performed.
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Rotation
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
with all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recomthe following diagram.
mended cold placard pressure.
Tire Rotation
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres- in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
sure.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects (20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
(Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illumiTPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
nates, you must increase the tire pressure to the recominflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard presmended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM Telltale
sure value.
Light to turn off. The system will automatically update and
the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the system
receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need
5
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to your local dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Various TPMS messages, which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
• TPM Telltale Light
Premium System
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each TPMS will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure when it is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare
readings to the receiver module.
with a pressure below the low-pressure limit will not
cause the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
illuminate or the chime to sound.
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module
• Four TPM sensors
5
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙LOW TIRE⬙
message and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing or
changing color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be
displayed.
Tire Pressure Monitor Display
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
flashing or in a different color in the EVIC graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation
value as shown in the ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC will stop flashing or change color back to the
original color, and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
5
Low Tire Pressure Monitor Display
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
Service TPMS Warning
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. 3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
wheel housings.
EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
for a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (-) in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor 5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
is not being received.
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
flash, and the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no message is then followed with a graphic display with
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place pressure values still shown. This indicates that the presof the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
following:
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Vehicles With Full Size Spare
Vehicles With Compact Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly 1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning 2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnlimit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In
addition, the EVIC will display a low pressure mesTelltale Light will remain ON and a chime will sound.
In addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
sage and a graphic showing the low tire pressure
flashing pressure value or a pressure value in a
value flashing or in a different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙
message will also be displayed.
different color. An ⬙Inflate to XX⬙ message will also be
displayed.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn 3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on
OFF, and the pressure value displayed will be updated
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
and stop flashing or return to its original color as long
addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
limit in any of the four active road tires.
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC
will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and • This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opreinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
eration.
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the followthe EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of ing licenses:
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the
MRXC4W4MA4
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active United States
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to Canada
2546A-C4W4MA4
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World6.4L Engine
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
The 6.4L engine is designed to meet all and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recomemissions regulations and provide excel- mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specilent fuel economy and performance when fications if they are available.
using high-quality premium unleaded
Reformulated Gasoline
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
higher.
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are speyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imhigh speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
prove air quality.
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi- The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
before considering service for the vehicle.
fuel system components.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasogenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
may be used in your vehicle.
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
E-85 perform the following:
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the Materials Added To Fuel
engine controller memory.
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
exposure to E-85 fuel.
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
MMT In Gasoline
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) fuel.
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located in the
driver’s door map pocket).
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door.
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door to break the ice buildup and re-release the fuel
door using the inside release button. Do not pry on the
door.
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
3. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door inside the
pipe seals the system.
4. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe – the nozzle
opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
NOTE: Only the correct size nozzle opens the latches
allowing the flapper door to open.
5
5. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel door.
NOTE: A funnel is provided (located in the trunk in the
spare tire area) to open the flapper door to allow for
emergency refueling with a gas can.
Fuel Funnel
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the fuel door is open or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the “Malfunction Indicator
Light” to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a portable
container that is inside of a vehicle. You could be
burned. Always place fuel containers on the
ground while filling.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Remove the access cover (located on the left side inner
trim panel).
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
Access Cover
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
3. Pull the release cable.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
Release Cable
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
VEHICLE LOADING
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on the • Type of Vehicle
“Vehicle Certification Label”. This information should be
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
used for passenger and luggage loading as indicated.
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Overloading
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
it is not over the GVWR.
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
rear GAWR.
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
WARNING!
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
Loading
TRAILER TOWING
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
NOTE:
• Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed to the
rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWRs.
• Refer to the “Tire Placard” for your vehicle’s proper
tire pressure.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the ground,
or using a towing dolly) is NOT ALLOWED. The only
acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle trailer with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .488 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .502
䡵 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .490
䡵 TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
▫ TIREFIT Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
▫ TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation . . . . .492
▫ TIREFIT Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .509
6
488 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
switch bank near the top center of the instrument panel. IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
speed.
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 489
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
6
490 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
130 Ft-Lbs (176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 491
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
WARNING!
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIREFIT KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Torque Patterns
6
492 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
TIREFIT Storage
TIREFIT Kit Components And Operation
The TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk.
TIREFIT Components
TIREFIT Location
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on bottom
side of TIREFIT Kit)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 493
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your TIREFIT kit is equipped with the following symbols
to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Using The Deflation Button
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
TIREFIT Usage Precautions
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this • Replace the TIREFIT Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant
position for air pump operation only. Use the
Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at the
Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting this mode.
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to assure
optimum operation of the system. Refer to “Sealing a
Selecting Sealant Mode
Tire with TIREFIT” section (F) “Sealant Bottle and
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to this
Hose Replacement”.
position to inject the TIREFIT Sealant and to
inflate the tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose) (6) when
selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the TIREFIT kit. Push and release the Power
Button (4) again to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
6
494 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once the
sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the
TIREFIT kit.
• You can use the TIREFIT air pump to inflate bicycle
tires. The kit also comes with two needles, located in
the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of
the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or similar
inflatable items. However, use only the Air Pump Hose
TIREFIT Expiration Date Location
(7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
sealant into them. The TIREFIT Sealant is only inuse. Always replace these components immediately at
tended to seal punctures less than ¼” (6 mm) diameter
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
in the tread of your vehicle.
• When the TIREFIT sealant is in a liquid form, clean • Do not lift or carry the TIREFIT kit by the hoses.
water, and a damp cloth will remove the material from
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 495
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the vehicle
closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when using the TIREFIT kit.
• Do not use TIREFIT or drive the vehicle under the
following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4” (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
• Keep TIREFIT away from open flames or heat
source.
• A loose TIREFIT kit thrown forward in a collision
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the
vehicle. Always stow the TIREFIT kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to
come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with plenty of
water if there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if there is any
contact with clothing.
(Continued)
(Continued)
6
496 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• TIREFIT Sealant solution contains latex. In case of
an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician
immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
plenty of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
Sealing A Tire With TIREFIT
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use TIREFIT:
when injecting the sealant into the deflated tire and
running the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to
place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the ignition.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use TIREFIT:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s 2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the 3. Place the TIREFIT kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the TIREFIT Hoses (6) and (7) to reach
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the valve stem and keep the TIREFIT kit flat on the
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
ground. This will provide the best positioning of the kit
valve stem.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 497
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the TIREFIT kit.
Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve stem.
nails) from the tire.
Make sure the valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect
(C) Injecting TIREFIT Sealant Into The Deflated
the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem. Check that the
Tire:
Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant Mode position
• Always start the engine before turning ON the TIREand not Air Mode. Press the Power Button (4) to turn
FIT kit.
On the TIREFIT kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the 2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
turning ON the TIREFIT kit.
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
6
498 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the pressure within 15 minutes:
Sealant Hose (6):
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflaseconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomHose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
empty.
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the TIREFIT kit.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instruoperate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
ment panel.
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 499
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the TIREFIT kit in the vehicle
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
TIREFIT kit components which may cause permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the TIREFIT Sealant within the tire. Do not
exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
TIREFIT is not a permanent flat tire repair. Have the
tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using
TIREFIT. Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the
tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to follow this
warning can result in injuries that are serious or fatal
to you, your passengers, and others around you.
6
500 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(E) After Driving:
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop 1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on TIREFIT and
to Use TIREFIT” before continuing.
inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire and
loading information label on the driver-side door
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
opening.
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recomvehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve 2. Disconnect the TIREFIT kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
stem.
Volt outlet.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
3. Place the TIREFIT kit in its proper storage area in the
Gauge (3).
vehicle.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
service center.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 501
5. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) 4. Clean any remaining sealant from the TIREFIT housing.
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacethat the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
ment”.
the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authobottle is locked into place.
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the TIREFIT service kit.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
7. Return the TIREFIT kit to its storage location in the
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
vehicle.
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
6
502 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
Preparations For Jump-Start
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and engine compartment for jump-starting.
precautions.
NOTE: The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
on the right side of the vehicle looking over the fender.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 503
WARNING!
Remote Battery Post Locations
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
6
504 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
WARNING!
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 505
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle
battery.
with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
in the reverse sequence:
you should have the battery and charging system inspected at your authorized dealer.
6
506 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged
in long enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
maintain the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 507
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
WARNING!
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
(Continued)
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the rubber liner from the storage tray (located
next to the shifter on the center console).
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
6
508 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the access port 6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
(in the left side of the storage bin), and push and hold
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
the override release lever in.
8. Reinstall the rubber storage bin liner.
Shift Lever Override
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 509
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial wrecker service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Front
Flatbed
Rear
ALL
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
ALL MODELS
IF Transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed
• 15 mi (24 km) max distance
OK
BEST METHOD
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
6
510 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the Key Fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, see “Shift Lever Override” in this section for
instructions on shifting the transmission out of PARK for
towing.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Damage to the fascia will occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to the front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position, not in the OFF or ACC position.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position,
not in the OFF or ACC position.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 511
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
CAUTION!
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, this vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15
miles (24 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground
(on a flatbed, or with the rear wheels raised using a wheel
lift and the transmission in NEUTRAL).
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L (392 HEMI) . . .515
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .516
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .519
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
▫ A/C Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
7
514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
▫ Appearance Care And Protection
From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .552
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .557
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ Front Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp, And Side
Marker Lamp — Models With Halogen
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Front Low Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn
Lamp — Models With High Intensity Discharge
Headlamps (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
▫ Backup Lamps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L (392 HEMI)
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Engine Coolant Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. following:
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not start this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
of a normal bulb check.
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
7
518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainteIf your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was Limited Warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519
DEALER SERVICE
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
7
520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids that
protect the performance and durability of your vehicle
and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not
use chemical flushes in these components as the
chemicals can damage your engine, transmission,
power steering or air conditioning. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a
flush is needed because of component malfunction,
use only the specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0 L) of
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change incheck the engine oil level is about five minutes after a tervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
fully warmed engine is shut off.
whichever occurs first.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine
oil viscosity for your engine. For information on engine oil
For best performance and maximum protection under all
filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintypes of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
Materials Added To Engine Oil
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
Engine Oil Selection
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic The manufacturer strongly recommends against the adSAE 0W-40 engine oil or equivalent meeting the require- dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
ments of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12633.
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity
Use Pennzoil Ultra™ 0W-40 engine or equivalent
MOPAR® oil meeting the Chrysler Material Standard
MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
7
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
maintenance intervals.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in
the trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the
engine compartment for jump starting. Refer to “JumpStarting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
7
Battery Location
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
Air Conditioner Maintenance
WARNING! (Continued)
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
7
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
— If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product
with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
7
Access Door
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Filter Access Cover
3. Remove the used filter.
A/C Air Filter
5. Close the filter access cover.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the maintenance intervals.
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on
geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perforThe external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
mance
of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
water
lines
or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
present,
clean
the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
7
530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 L) of washer
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
equipped).
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
WARNING!
operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the
residual water.
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
Adding Washer Fluid
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
7
532 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 533
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Cooling System
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or cycle the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
7
534 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antiCheck engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) only ac- Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
cording to Chrysler Service Manual procedure or by an
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
authorized dealer. Check the front of the radiator for any
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MSspraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
12106).
face of the condenser.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubmaintenance intervals.
ber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
leaks.
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
needed to be added to the system please contact your
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
local authorized dealer.
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
Coolant Checks
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 535
Selection Of Coolant
CAUTION! (Continued)
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
(Continued)
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
7
536 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc- • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deioning this extended maintenance period, it is important that
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
ing to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainthat meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing acdard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 537
NOTE:
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recommended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
7
538 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator/coolant pressure cap
unless checking for engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze
point or replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that meets
spills immediately.
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS12106 should be added to the coolant bottle. Do not
Coolant Level
overfill.
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 539
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
for leaks.
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor- • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106)
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporyour engine which contains aluminum components.
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Points To Remember
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
7
540 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when perIn order to assure brake system performance, all brake forming underhood services.
system components should be inspected periodically. Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
maintenance intervals.
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Brake System
WARNING!
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MainCheck the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 541
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
7
542 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION! (Continued)
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
(Continued)
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 543
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is
provided. Your authorized dealer can check your transmission fluid level using a special service dipstick.
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transIf you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
mission is disassembled for any reason.
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
7
544 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Axle
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons the
exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be inspected.
If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Fluid Level Check
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
axle. The fluid level should be at the bottom of the fill
hole. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
Change Axle Fluid
resistance built into your vehicle.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 545
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
and Tar Remover to remove.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
The most common causes are:
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
What Causes Corrosion?
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
7
546 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
open.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
Special Care
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
considered the responsibility of the owner.
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating, mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.
the owner.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by
salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 547
control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and
mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s
protective coating that helps keep them from corroding
and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire
and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent
damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or
select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or
NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong
chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor
acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel
or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently
surface.
damage this finish and such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh
brushes. These products and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel
Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may
damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
7
548 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel
cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing
so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when
stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.
Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black
Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permanently damage this finish and such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE
ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 549
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Use MOPAR® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton
based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as
damage to the seat may result.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
7
550 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol- directly on the mirror.
lowed by rinsing.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
Glass Surfaces
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 551
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft with the cupholder in the center console.
cloth.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
FUSES
WARNING!
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)
7
552 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays.
Front Power Distribution Center
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 553
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
7
554 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Cartridge Fuse
–
40 Amp Green
50 Amp Red
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
25 Amp Natural
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
–
–
25 Amp Natural
Description
Fuse – Spare
Radiator Fan #1
Power Steering #1
Starter
Anti-Lock Brakes
Anti-Lock Brakes
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
Security
Horns
Air Conditioning Clutch
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Transmission
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 555
Cavity
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
Cartridge Fuse
–
50 Amp Red
50 Amp Red
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
25 Amp Natural
15 Amp Blue
–
25 Amp Natural
–
–
25 Amp Natural
Description
Fuse – Spare
Radiator Fan #2
Power Steering #2
Wiper Motor
Headlamp Washers
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuel Pump
Transmission Shifter
Fuse – Spare
Engine Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Powertrain #1
7
556 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
35
36
37
38
39
48
49
50
51
52
53
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
Description
Powertrain #2
Anti-Lock Brake Module
Engine Controller/Rad Fan Relays
Airbag Module
Power Steering Module/AC Clutch Relay
AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Vacuum Pump
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 557
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Rear Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
7
558 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
–
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
Mini-Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
15
16
17
40 Amp Green
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Front PDC Feed #1
Fuse – Spare
Front PDC Feed #2
Sunroof
Exterior Lighting #1
Exterior Lighting #2
Interior Lighting/Washer Pump
Power Locks
Driver Door
Passenger Door
Cigar Lighters, Instrument Panel & Power Outlet
Console Rear
HVAC Blower
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 559
Cavity
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
31
–
32
33
–
–
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
–
25 Amp Natural
25 Amp Natural
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
Description
Active Dampening Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port
Radio Screen
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fuse – Spare
Amplifier
Power Seats
HVAC Module/Cluster
Ignition Switch/Wireless Module
7
560 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
34
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
44
45
46
47
48
–
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
–
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
–
25 Amp
Natural
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Steering Column Module/Clock
Battery Sensor
Fuse – Spare
Radio
Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Rear Defrost
Rear Heated Seats/Steering Wheel
Park Assist/Blind Spot/Camera
Cluster/Rearview Mirror/Compass
Adaptive Cruise Control
Adaptive Front Lighting
Active Suspension
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 561
Cavity
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
–
–
–
–
10 Amp Red
–
–
–
–
–
Description
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Front Heated Seats
Heated Cupholders/Rear Heated Seat Switches
HVAC Module/In Car Temperature Sensor
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Airbag Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
7
562 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
64
Cartridge Fuse
–
65
66
67
68
69
70
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini-Fuse
25 Amp Natural
10 Amp Red
–
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
–
–
Description
Rear Windows
Airbag Module
Fuse – Spare
Run Sense
Illumination/Rear Sunshade
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 563
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
W5W
Rear Courtesy/Reading
Lamps
Rear Compartment
562
(Trunk) Lamp
Overhead Console
578
Reading Lamp
Visor Vanity Lamps
A6220
Glove Box Lamp – If
194
Equipped
Door Courtesy
562
Shift Indicator Lamp
JKLE14140
Optional Door Map
LED (Serviced at
Pocket/Cup Holder
Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for
replacement instructions.
7
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam Headlamp
(Standard Halogen)
Low Beam Headlamp –
High Intensity Discharge
(HID)
High Beam Headlamp
Front Park/Turn Lamp
Front Fog Lamp – If
Equipped
Front Side Marker
Rear Tail Lamp
Rear Stop/Turn Lamp
Rear Side Marker
Bulb Number
H11
D3S (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
Backup Lamp
Center High-Mount Stop
Lamp (CHMSL)
License
Bulb Number
3157
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
168
BULB REPLACEMENT
9005
3157A
PSX24W
168
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at
Authorized Dealer)
168
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
Front Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam
Headlamp, Park/Turn Lamp, And Side Marker
Lamp — Models With Halogen Headlamps
1. Open the hood.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the headlamp assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be Front Low Beam Headlamp And Park/Turn Lamp
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlamp — Models With High Intensity Discharge
Headlamps (HID)
assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly coun- HID Headlamps
terclockwise, and then pull it out of the headlamp The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
assembly.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
CAUTION!
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the an authorized dealer for service.
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
7
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlight switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lights. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Backup Lamps
1. Open trunk.
2. Remove fastener from cover.
Fastener Cover
3. Remove cover.
4. Twist the bulb one quarter turn to remove.
5. Reinstall new bulb.
6. Install cover and fastener.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
7
Socket Assembly
1 — License Lamp Bulb
2 — Socket
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil With Filter
6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified)
Cooling System *
6.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT
coolant conforming to MS-12106) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
19 Gallons
Metric
72 Liters
7 Quarts
6.6 Liters
15.2 Quarts
14.4 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming
to MS-12106).
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN. The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra™ 0W-40 or
equivalent MOPAR® engine oil meeting the requirements
of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all
operating temperatures.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs
(Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm]).
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher.
7
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Rear Axle
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Use only ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure
to use ATF+4® fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission. We recommend MOPAR®
ATF+4® fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3 brake fluid. If
DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is
acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Power Steering Fluid +
4, or MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W–90 (API GL-5) in addition to MOPAR®
Friction Modifier — Hypoid Gear Additive).
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . .573
8
572 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced as
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this manual
must be done at the times or mileages specified to protect NOTE:
your vehicle warranty and ensure the best vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be • The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil
needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions, such as
if it has been six months since your last oil change,
dusty areas and very short trip driving. Inspection and
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
service should also be done anytime a malfunction is
illuminated.
suspected.
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is • Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) equipped • Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichvehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the
ever comes first.
EVIC and a single chime will sound, indicating that an oil
change is necessary.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change indi- message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
cator message will illuminate. This means that service is scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 573
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and power steering, and add as
Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your
needed.
Instrument Panel” for further information.
At Each Stop For Fuel
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” At Each Oil Change
for further information.
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if re- • Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
quired.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
Required Maintenance Intervals
as required.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
8
574 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or 12
months.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km)
or 12 months.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 575
18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
576 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc
brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 577
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
578 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of
the following: police, taxi, fleet, or other severe usage.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 579
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
580 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 581
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Inspect and replace the PCV Valve if
necessary.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc
brakes.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the spark plugs.*
* Spark plug change interval is mileage based only, Monthly intervals do not apply.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
8
582 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 583
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months or 150,000 miles (240 000 km)
whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
8
584 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Inspect the rear axle fluid.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or 132 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 585
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If you are using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the engine air
cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect the exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all
parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏ Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
586 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc
brakes.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) or 120
months whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature, Authorized Service Center
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 587
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . .593
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .591
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 䡵 MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .595
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .592
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.. . .595
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .592
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
▫ In Mexico Contact:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .596
9
590 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . .597
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 591
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
592 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Owner’s name and address
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Authorized dealer name
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
solved with this process.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
P.O. Box 21–8004
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer Phone: (800) 423–6343
center.
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenP.O. Box 1621
ter should include the following information:
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 593
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
594 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 595
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
operating at its best.
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer.
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
MOPAR® PARTS
9
596 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 597
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforAll passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety mance.
requirements in addition to these grades.
9
598 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
600 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .243
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 70
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 74, 100, 321
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64, 67, 70
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . .64, 67, 70
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .522
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395, 527
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525, 526
Air Conditioning System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .393, 525
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535, 568
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). . . . . . . . . . . . .429, 431
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
INDEX 601
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Automatic Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .393
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408, 543
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543, 570
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542, 543
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .26
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50, 100
Bluetooth®
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone
Or Audio Device After Pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone . . . . . .143, 174
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A
Mobile Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540, 570
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
10
602 INDEX
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . .97
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563, 564
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 563
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 479
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320, 517
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Child Restraints
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .88
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .83
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
INDEX 603
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . .380
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .537
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534, 538
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .535, 568, 569
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304, 551
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . .345, 360
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100, 390
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
10
604 INDEX
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors . . . . . .35
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 31
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Key Fob Emergency Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .338
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .552
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . .239, 243
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .328
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .328
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
EVIC Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
EVIC Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328, 330
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
INDEX 605
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .517
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534, 569
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 479
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520, 568, 569
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337, 520
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521, 568
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 479
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99, 531
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
10
606 INDEX
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395, 527
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522, 569
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 223, 317
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Fluid Level Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .543
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .569
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222, 317
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270, 332
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
INDEX 607
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475, 569
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Saver Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Fuel Optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .148, 186, 267, 474
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . .286, 293
Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Gauges
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .224
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 231
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
10
608 INDEX
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Holder, Coin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.224
.218
.220
.530
.530
.207
.207
.114
.203
.405
.224
.437
.308
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated Entry . . . . . .
Immobilizer (Sentry Key)
Infant Restraint . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 26
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.12
.22
.16
.76
INDEX 609
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 26
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36, 402
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 353, 369
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . .36, 353, 369
Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Keyless Enter-N-Go™™
Keyless Enter-N-Go™™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Kicker Sound System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Latch Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 563
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 218
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 74, 100, 321
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
10
610 INDEX
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . .222, 224
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222, 317
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218, 565
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . .219, 231
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .320
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .228
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224, 284
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563, 564
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .320
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .319, 466
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 222, 223
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .317
INDEX 611
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483, 485
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .519
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . . .320, 517
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Mopar Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518, 595
10
612 INDEX
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 67, 72
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . .64, 67, 70
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . .475, 569
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318, 337
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318, 337
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520, 569
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337, 520
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522, 569
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521, 568
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521, 568
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327, 488
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 596
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Pedals, Adjustable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
INDEX 613
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Pets, Transporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Phone (Pairing). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
Phone (Uconnect®). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125, 149
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .448
Power
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .557
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .299
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425, 426
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .234
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .23
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .537
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .544
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Rear Window Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
10
614 INDEX
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . .18, 26
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .18, 26
Remote Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .381
Remote Starting
EVIC Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Exit Remote Start Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features . . .371
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . .318, 337
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
INDEX 615
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .572
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46, 50, 100
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .55
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50, 51
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
10
616 INDEX
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 223, 317
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Sound System
Kicker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459, 460
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . .239, 243
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 401
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
INDEX 617
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425, 426
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233, 234
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233, 234
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .381
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394, 563
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .60
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Telescoping Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . .233, 234
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .393
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . .326, 489
Tilt Steering Column. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233, 234
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .448
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .491
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102, 452, 597
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448, 449
10
618 INDEX
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 452
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .485
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406, 408, 542
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542, 570
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23, 26
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .23
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 46
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Turn Signals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223, 317
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
INDEX 619
Uconnect®
Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . .143, 174
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .371
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128, 152
Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134, 164
Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139, 169
Screen Activated Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144, 174
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24, 25, 371
Uconnect® phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Uconnect® Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Uconnect® Settings
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . .24, 34
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . .36, 353, 369
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . .36, 353, 369
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353, 369
Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .380
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449, 483, 485
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .19
Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394, 563
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . .317
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
10
620 INDEX
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230, 530
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 298
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228, 230
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
2014 Charger SRT
2014
OWNER’S MANUAL
FCA US LLC
14D482-126-AE
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Charger
SRT
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising